JP6981656B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine, and more particularly to a gaming effect.

In a conventional gaming machine, a starting port and a big winning opening are provided in a game area where a game ball can flow down, and a special symbol is variablely displayed on a symbol display when the game ball wins a prize at the starting opening, and a big hit lottery is performed. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a symbol indicating the lottery result, a jackpot game is performed in which the normally closed jackpot is opened, and in the jackpot game, a large number of game balls are won in the jackpot. You can win a prize ball.

By the way, when the special symbol is variablely displayed, the game is produced by lighting / blinking the image (including the moving image) displayed on the image display for the effect, the sound output from the speaker, and the light emitting body such as the lamp. (See, for example, Patent Document 1).

As a game effect, a variable effect is performed in which a plurality of effect symbols start variable display at the same time as the change of the special symbol is started, and then the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination display mode showing the lottery result of the jackpot lottery. In this variable effect, a notice effect that suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit is performed during the variable display of the effect symbol (see, for example, Patent Document 2).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200900 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2009-268705

Traditionally, there is still room for improvement in game production in order to improve the interest of games.
An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of performing a gaming effect that can improve the interest of the gaming.

The present invention has the following configurations. The reference numerals indicate an example of the correspondence with the components shown in the drawings for the purpose of promoting understanding of the present invention, and do not limit the technical scope of the present invention.
The gaming machine (1) of the present invention includes an effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing a predetermined effect related to the game, and the effect control means is a predetermined position (1st image display device 70) of the display means (first image display device 70). For example, a main effect (for example, an effect by a symbol display, a character display, a character display, etc. shown in FIG. 52) performed in a display area including a central area) and at least a part of the display means in the outer edge direction than the main effect. It is possible to execute an emphasis effect (for example, an effect by an effect image, a flash image, etc. shown in FIG. 52) for emphasizing the main effect using a predetermined area of the above, and the main effect is a first form (for example, an effect by a flash image, etc.). It can be executed in a plurality of types of forms by the pseudo-continuous effect shown in FIG. 53) or a second form different from the first form (for example, the battle effect during reach shown in FIG. 56), and the main effect of the second form. The first main effect (for example, a battle effect between one ally character and an enemy character shown in FIG. 73) performed during the execution of the emphasis effect in the second form, and the emphasis effect in the second form of the main effect. The emphasis effect includes the second main effect (for example, a battle effect between two friendly characters and one enemy character who fought together as shown in FIGS. 73 and 74) performed during execution, and the emphasis effect is the main effect. When the output is executed in the first form (pseudo-continuous effect), the first effect (yellow effect image) among a plurality of types of emphasis effects (yellow, green, red effect image) can be executed. When the main effect is executed in the second form (battle effect), the second effect (red or rainbow effect image) among a plurality of types of emphasis effects (blue, green, red, rainbow effect image) can be executed. The effect control means changes from the first main effect to the second main effect through a predetermined transition effect (for example, a development flash image in the chance-up notice shown in FIG. 73, an accessory operation). After that, what is the third form of the display mode including characters different from the first and second main effects (for example, the character image of "SUPERBONUS" in the jackpot effect shown in FIG. 64) or the third form? A third main effect (for example, the jackpot effect shown in FIG. 64) and the first effect that can be performed in the fourth form of the display mode including different characters (for example, the character image of "BONUS" in the jackpot effect shown in FIG. 64). It is possible to execute a specific enhancement effect (flash image) of a predetermined light emitting mode that emphasizes the display mode of the main effect of 3 , and in the specific enhancement effect, the third main effect is the third form (character image of SUPERBONUS). ) When the third effect (afterglow flash A image) displayed in the first light emission mode is executed and the third main effect is executed in the fourth form (character image of BONUS), The second effect is more than the case where the fourth effect (afterglow flash C image) displayed in the second light emission mode different from the first light emission mode is executed and the first effect (yellow effect image) is executed. When (red or rainbow effect image) is executed, the third effect (rear light flash A image) executed in the third form (character image of SUPERBONUS) and the specific game (advantageous to the player) are performed. The big hit) is easy to execute.

According to the present invention, it is possible to execute a game effect having an effect of visually appealing to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a figure which shows an example of the front view of the gaming machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the block diagram of the whole game machine. It is a figure which shows the main processing in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the input control processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 1st start port detection switch input process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure special electric control processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the type of the command transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board. It is a figure which shows the type of the command transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board. It is a figure which shows the main processing in an effect control part. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing in an effect control part. It is a figure which shows the icon change effect processing in an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows the icon change effect determination process in an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the icon final display mode determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the change scenario determination table. It is a figure which shows the icon display mode update process in an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the change pattern determination table for hold icon. It is a figure which shows an example of the one-step change pattern determination table for the icon. It is a figure which shows an example of the two-step change pattern determination table for the icon. (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between the holding icon display mode and the change effect occurrence timing, and (b) is a diagram showing the relationship 1 between the change effect type and the change effect occurrence timing. Yes, (c) is a diagram showing the relationship 2 between the change effect type and the change effect occurrence timing, and (d) shows the relationship between the icon display mode and the notification sound when the icon is generated (change). It is a figure which shows. It is a figure which shows the main processing in the integrated control unit. It is a figure which shows the command reception interrupt processing in a general control unit. It is a figure which shows the V blank interrupt processing in a general control unit. It is a timing chart 1 of the change effect at the time of winning. It is a timing chart 2 of the change effect at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the production example of the change effect at the time of a prize. It is the timing chart 1 of the normal change pattern 01. It is the timing chart 2 of the normal change pattern 01. It is a figure which shows the production example of a normal change pattern 01. It is the timing chart 1 of the character action change pattern 01. It is a timing chart 2 of the character action change pattern 01. It is a figure which shows the production example of the character action change pattern 01. It is a figure which shows the continuation of FIG. 32. It is a timing chart 1 of the symbol action change pattern 01. It is a timing chart 2 of the symbol action change pattern 01. It is a figure which shows the effect example of the symbol action change pattern 01. It is a figure which shows the continuation of FIG. 36. It is a timing chart in which the fluctuation effect is started from the customer waiting state. It is a figure which shows the production example which starts the fluctuation effect from the customer waiting state. It is a figure which shows the continuation of FIG. 39. It is a timing chart in which the number of holds increases during the fluctuation effect. It is a figure which shows the effect example which the number of hold increases during a variable effect. It is a timing chart that the number of holdings increases immediately after the decrease. It is a figure which shows the production example which increases immediately after the holding number decreases. It is a timing chart in which the number of holds increases during a specific reach production. It is a figure which shows the effect example which the number of hold increases during a specific reach effect. It is a timing chart that the number of reservations increases and decreases before and after the end of the specific game state. It is a figure which shows the effect example that the number of hold is increased or decreased before and after the end of a specific game state. It is a figure which shows the continuation of FIG. 48. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation effect pattern determination table for loss. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation effect pattern determination table for a big hit. It is a figure about a main production and an emphasis production. It is a figure regarding the emphasis production corresponding to the main production performed by the pseudo continuous notice. It is a figure which shows the selection table of the suggestion effect performed by the pseudo continuous notice. It is a figure which shows the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous production performed by the pseudo-continuous notice, and the degree of expectation of the big hit winning of TOTAL by the suggestion effect and the emphasis effect. It is a figure about the emphasis production corresponding to the main production performed in the reach production. It is a figure which shows the selection table of the battle production pattern of the loss SP / SPSP reach production. It is a figure which shows the selection table of the battle production pattern of a jackpot SP / SPSP reach production. It is a figure which shows the dialogue notice determination table. It is a figure which shows the chance up notice execution determination table. It is a figure which shows the look-ahead continuous notice execution determination table. It is a figure regarding the emphasis production corresponding to the main production of the look-ahead continuous notice. It is a figure about the emphasis effect corresponding to the main effect of the result notification effect. It is a figure about the emphasis production corresponding to the main production of a jackpot production. It is a figure regarding the display mode of the effect symbol. It is a figure about the emphasis effect corresponding to the main effect of a mode notification effect. It is a figure which shows the production example of the production pattern of a normal reach. It is a figure which shows the production example of the production pattern of SP / SP / SP reach production. It is a figure which shows the production example of the production pattern in which the dialogue notice is executed. It is a figure which shows the production example of the highlighting color maintenance effect executed by the pseudo continuous notice. It is a figure which shows the continuation of FIG. 70. It is a figure which shows the continuation of FIG. 71. It is a figure which shows the effect example of the highlighting color maintenance effect executed in the SP reach effect. It is a figure which shows the effect example of the button change effect executed in the SP reach effect. It is a figure which shows the production example of the defeat production of the battle production of SP reach production. It is a figure which shows the production example of the challenge effect which occurs after reach loss. It is a figure which shows the production example of the victory production of a jackpot decision production and a battle production. It is a figure which shows the production example of the promotion effect which usually occurs after a big hit. FIG. 78 is a diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 78 and showing an example of a repetitive emphasis effect. It is a figure which shows the production example of the effect continuous notice production. It is a figure which shows the continuation of FIG. 80, and also shows the effect example of the repetitive emphasis effect. It is a timing chart before and after the execution of the jackpot decision effect (with button operation). It is a timing chart before and after the execution of the jackpot decision effect (with button operation). It is a timing chart before and after the execution of the jackpot decision effect (without button operation).

(First Embodiment)
Hereinafter, the first embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Composition of gaming machine)
The configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. 1 is an example of a front view of the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment.

The game machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, a game board mounting frame 3 rotatably supported by the outer frame 2, and a glass frame 4 rotatably supported by the game board mounting frame 3. A game board 5 is provided in which a game area 5a through which the game ball flows down is formed.

The outer frame 2 has a decorative plate attached to the lower front surface of a rectangular base frame whose central portion opens in the front-rear direction, and a fixing member (for example, a nail or a stopper) is attached to the island equipment of the amusement shop. It is fixed through.

The game board mounting frame 3 is detachably connected to the outer frame 2 via the first hinge mechanism portion 6 on one end side in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the first hinge mechanism portion 6 as a fulcrum. Has been done. Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is rotated with respect to the outer frame 2 like a door, the back surface side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed to the front, and various devices provided on the back surface side of the game board mounting frame 3 are exposed. It is possible to perform maintenance etc.

The glass frame 4 is detachably connected to the game board mounting frame 3 via the second hinge mechanism portion 7 on one end side in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the second hinge mechanism portion 7 as a fulcrum. There is. Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated with respect to the game board mounting frame 3 like a door, the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the front portion of the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed.

An opening (window portion) that opens in the front-rear direction is formed in a substantially central portion near the upper part of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member (glass plate, acrylic plate, etc.) is attached so as to close the opening from the rear. The game area 5a can be visually recognized through this opening and the transparent member.

Around the opening of the glass frame 4, an audio output device 9 composed of a speaker, a frame lighting device 10 having a plurality of decorative lamps (LEDs), and a game ball paid out from a game ball payout device 100 described later are used. The upper tray 11 for storing a plurality of game balls such as the above, the lower tray 12 for receiving and storing the game balls that have flowed into the overflow ball flow path described later without entering the upper tray 11, and the game balls are fired. A launch operation device 13 capable of the operation for the purpose is provided.

The audio output device 9 is provided at two locations above the glass frame 4 at intervals, and outputs BGM (background music), SE (sound effect), or the like to produce sound (music, audio). Further, a plurality of frame lighting devices 10 are provided around the opening, and the effect of lighting is performed by changing the irradiation direction and emission color of the light of each lamp (LED). Further, the frame lighting device 10 includes a notification LED 10a that is controlled to light / blink when the glass frame 4 is opened or a payout abnormality described later occurs.

In the upper tray 11, the bottom surface of the storage portion of the game ball is inclined downward toward the direction side (right direction) of the launch operation device 13, and the ball feed solenoid 11b is provided at the end of the downward inclination. When the game balls stored in the storage portion of the upper tray 11 flow down and reach the ball feed solenoid 11b, the game balls are sent out one by one toward the game board mounting frame 3 side by the operation of the ball feed solenoid 11b.

Further, in the portion on the front side of the center of the upper tray 11, an effect button device 16 and a selection button device 18 functioning as input devices for performing a determination operation and a selection operation related to various effects described later are provided side by side. ing.

The effect button device 16 has an effect button 17 capable of performing a determination operation (operation input), an effect button detection switch 17a for detecting an operation on the effect button 17, and an effect button 17 for moving the effect button 17 in the vertical direction. The button drive motor 17b, the button vibration motor 17c for changing the effect button 17 into a normal state and a vibration state vibrating in a predetermined mode, and the effect button 17 are changed into a quenching state and a light emitting state that emits light in a predetermined mode. A button quenching LED 17d for this purpose is provided, and a player can input predetermined information to the game machine 1.

The selection button device 18 is provided with a cross key 19 capable of performing an operation such as a selection operation, and a cross key detection switch 19a connected to the cross key 19 for detecting an operation on the cross key 19. , The player can input predetermined information to the game machine 1.

Further, a lending / returning operation unit 20 capable of lending a game ball and returning a storage medium such as a card storing a balance is provided in a portion to the right of the upper tray 11. When the lending button (not shown) of the lending / returning operation unit 20 is operated, the game ball is lent out by subtracting the balance stored in the storage medium accepted by the ball lending machine juxtaposed with the game machine 1. When the return button (not shown) of the lending / returning operation unit 20 is operated, the storage medium is returned from the ball lending machine.

An overflow ball flow path (not shown) for receiving a game ball that does not fit in the upper saucer 11 and guiding the game ball to the lower saucer 12 is formed between the upper saucer 11 and the lower saucer 12. Further, in the middle of the overflow ball flow path, a saucer full detection switch 32a for detecting that the game ball is full is provided in the lower saucer 12, and the lower saucer 12 is detected by the saucer full detection switch 32a. During that time, the payout of the game ball by the game ball payout device 100, which will be described later, is stopped.

The launch operation device 13 is a touch sensor that detects that the base 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, the launch handle 15a rotatably provided on the base 14, and the launch handle 15 are touched by the player's hand. A firing volume 15b including a 15a, a variable resistance notation whose resistance value changes depending on the rotation angle of the firing handle 15, and a handle light emitting device 15c for causing the firing handle 15 to emit light in a predetermined mode are provided. When the touch sensor 15a detects that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15, the ball feed solenoid 11b is activated to feed the game balls one by one.

The handle light emitting device 15c constitutes a front side portion of the firing handle 15 and is formed in a dome shape that bulges forward, and a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an internal space defined by a lens member capable of transmitting light. Has been done. By emitting light from this LED, it is possible to execute a light emitting effect that causes the firing handle 15 to emit light in a predetermined mode. Further, at the front end portion of the handle light emitting device 15c, a blower port 15d which is a blowout port of the wind (air) sent out from the blower device 21 described later is provided.

On the back surface side of the glass frame 4, a blower device 21 for sending wind (air) in a predetermined manner is provided at a position corresponding to the launch operation device 13. The blower device 21 includes a blower unit (not shown) for blowing out wind (air) and a blower motor (not shown) for operating the blower unit, and the blower unit 21 blows out air (air). ) Is sent from the air outlet 15d to the player's hand through the inside of the base 14 of the firing operation device 13 and the handle light emitting device 15c. By operating the blower device 21, it is possible to execute a blower effect of sending wind (air) in a predetermined manner toward the hand of the player who is operating the firing handle 15.

It should be noted that the blower 21 is not provided at a position corresponding to the launch operation device 13, but is provided around the decorative plate portion of the outer frame 2 or the transparent member of the glass frame 4 to blow wind (air) toward the player. You may send it out. Further, a plurality of blowers 21 may be provided.

The game board mounting frame 3 includes a game board mounting portion (not shown) for mounting the game board 5, a game ball launching device (not shown) for firing the game ball toward the game area 5a, and a game board. A lock mechanism 27 for closing the mounting frame 3 and the glass frame 4 and an opening detection switch 31a for detecting the opening (opening / closing) of the glass frame 4 are provided.

The game board mounting portion is formed in a concave chamber shape with a front opening at substantially the center near the upper part of the game board mounting frame 3, and the game board 5 can be stored from the front. An opening that opens in the front-rear direction is provided in the inner part of the concave chamber of the game board mounting portion, and various devices provided on the back surface side of the game board 5 face the rear of the game machine 1 through this opening. ..

The game ball launching device includes a launching member (not shown) for launching the game ball, a launching solenoid 28b for driving the launching member, and an ascending inclination from the launching member toward the left lower end portion of the game board 5. A launch rail (not shown) and a stopper for stopping the game ball at the launch position at the lower end of the tilt of the launch rail are provided. Then, when the game ball sent out by the ball feed solenoid 11b is received at the launch position, the game ball is launched toward the game area 5a by the operation of the launch member.

The lock mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board mounting portion, and the front end portion of the cylinder in which the keyhole is formed is exposed to the front side of the glass frame 4. Then, when a dedicated key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the lock of the game board mounting frame 3 is released and the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed, and when rotated in the other direction, the glass frame The lock of 4 is released and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.

At a position near the outer edge of the game board 5, a curved inner rail 35, a curved outer rail 36 located outside the inner rail 35, and a ball guide for guiding the game ball toward the center of the game area 5a. A member 37 is provided. A launch ball guide path 38 is formed between the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36 to guide the game ball launched by the game ball launcher to the upstream portion of the game area 5a. Further, an out port 39 for guiding the flowing game ball to the outside of the game area (collection part of the game board mounting frame 3) is formed in the most downstream part of the game area 5a.

At the substantially center of the game area 5a, a frame-shaped decorative frame 40 for restricting the entry of the game ball into the so-called center case is provided, and an effect space is formed inside the decorative frame 40. Further, a warp device (not shown) for introducing a game ball flowing down the game area 5a into the decorative frame 40 is provided on the side portion of the decorative frame 40, and a warp device 41 is provided at the lower portion of the decorative frame 40. A stage portion is provided that rolls the game ball introduced inside the decorative frame 40 and causes it to flow down below the decorative frame 40.

At the lower part of the game area 5a, a plurality of (four in the present embodiment) general winning openings 43 capable of constantly winning (winning) a game ball are provided at intervals, and these general winning openings are provided. When the game balls that have won (winned) in 43 are detected by the general winning opening detection switch 43a, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are transferred from the game ball payout device (not shown) to the upper tray 11 as prize balls. It will be paid out.

On both sides (left side area, right side area) of the game area 5a, a normal map gate 44 (normal map start area) through which the game ball can pass is provided, and the game ball passing through the normal map gate 44 is provided. When it is detected by the gate detection switch 44a, a winning lottery (auxiliary game determination) of a normal symbol is performed. The winning lottery for ordinary symbols will be described later.

A first starting port 45 (special drawing starting area) in which a game ball can always win (win) is provided in the lower part of the game area 5a and directly below the stage portion, and the first starting port 45 is provided. When a winning (winning) game ball is detected by the first start port detection switch 45a, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out from the game ball payout device to the upper tray 11 as a prize ball. ing. In addition to paying out the prize balls, a big hit lottery (special game determination) for the first special symbol (identification information) described later is performed.

Immediately below the first starting port 45, a game ball is impossible or difficult to win (winning) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (a winning lottery for a normal symbol). A variable starting portion 46 is provided, which can be converted into an open state (special mode) in which a winning (ball winning) is possible or easy.

The variable starting unit 46 detects a second starting port 47 (special drawing starting area) in which the game ball can win (winning) and a second starting port 47 (special drawing starting area) for detecting the winning (winning) of the game ball in the second starting port 47. A start port detection switch 47a, a movable member 48 that converts (variable) the second start port 47 into a closed state and an open state, and a second start port open / close solenoid 48b for opening / closing the movable member 48 are provided. ing. Then, when the second starting port 47 is in the closed state, it becomes impossible or difficult to win the game ball, and when the second starting port 47 is in the open state, the game ball is won (winning). (Entering the ball) is possible or easy.

Further, when a game ball winning (winning) in the second starting port 47 is detected by the second starting port detection switch 47a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three) are raised as prize balls from the game ball payout device. It is designed to be paid out to the saucer 11. In addition to paying out the prize balls, a big hit lottery (special game determination) for the second special symbol (identification information) described later is performed.

Above the guide member 37 and downstream of the normal gate 44 on the right side, a closed state in which it is impossible to win a game ball (winning) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (winning a big hit lottery of a special symbol). A variable winning section 49 is provided, which converts the (basic aspect) into an open state (special aspect) in which a game ball can be won (winning).

The variable winning unit 49 includes a large winning opening 50 in which a game ball can be won (winning), a large winning opening detection switch 50a for detecting a winning (winning) of a game ball in the large winning opening 50, and a large winning opening detection switch 50a. An opening / closing member 51 that converts (variable) the large winning opening 50 into a closed state and an open state, and a large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b for opening / closing the opening / closing member 51 are provided. When the large winning opening 50 is closed, it becomes impossible or difficult to win the game ball, and when the large winning opening 50 is open, the game ball is won (winning ball). ) Is possible or easy.

Further, when the game balls that have won (winned) in the large winning opening 50 are detected by the large winning opening detection switch 50a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 15) are used as prize balls from the game ball payout device on the upper tray 11. Will be paid out to.

On the back side of the game board 5, the general winning opening 43, the first starting opening 45, the second starting opening 47, and the large winning opening 50 are won, and the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, and the second A winning ball flow path (not shown) is provided in which the game balls detected by the starting port detection switch 47a and the large winning opening detection switch 50a are received and collected while flowing down.

In the downstream portion of the winning ball flow path, a winning confirmation detection switch 52a for detecting a game ball that has flowed down the winning ball flow path after being detected by various detection switches is provided. The winning confirmation detection switch 52a again detects the game ball after being detected by the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, the second starting opening detection switch 47a, and the large winning opening detection switch 50a. It is used to determine whether or not the prize is appropriate (winning ball).

On the outside of the game area 5a, there is a symbol display device including a first special symbol display 60, a second special symbol display 61, and a normal symbol display 62, a first special symbol hold display 63, and a second special symbol hold. A hold display device consisting of a display device 64 and a normal symbol hold display device 65, a round number display device 66 that displays the number of rounds when a jackpot state (special game state) occurs, and a jackpot game (special game) during or shortening the time. A right-handed display 67 is provided to prompt the player to launch the game ball toward the right side area of the game area 5a during the game state.

The first special symbol display 60 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol performed on the condition that the game ball wins (wins) in the first starting port 45. Is. The second special symbol display 61 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot lottery of the second special symbol performed on the condition that the game ball wins (wins) in the second starting port 47. Is. The ordinary symbol display 62 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of a winning lottery of ordinary symbols performed on the condition that a game ball wins (wins) at the normal symbol gate 44.

The big hit lottery of the first special symbol is a big hit judgment random value and a big hit by acquiring a big hit judgment random value etc. (judgment information) when a game ball wins (wins) in the first starting port 45. It corresponds to determining whether or not it is a "big hit" by comparing it with the determination value. When the big hit lottery of the first special symbol is performed, the variable display of the first special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display 60, and the stop display of the first special symbol indicating the lottery result is performed after a predetermined time has elapsed. Will be. That is, the stop display of the first special symbol is a notification of the lottery result.

The big hit lottery of the second special symbol is to acquire the random number value for big hit judgment (judgment information) when the game ball wins (wins) in the second starting port 47, and the acquired random number for big hit judgment and big hit judgment. It corresponds to determining whether or not it is a "big hit" by comparing it with the value. When the big hit lottery of the second special symbol is performed, the second special symbol display 61 displays the variation of the second special symbol, and after a predetermined time elapses, the stop display of the second special symbol indicating the lottery result is performed. Will be. That is, the stop display of the second special symbol is a notification of the lottery result.

The first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61 are each composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs of the corresponding indicators blink at predetermined intervals or in order in the variable display of each special symbol. Then, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED is turned on in a mode (big hit mode, loss mode) indicating the result of each jackpot lottery.

In addition, in this embodiment, "big hit" means a big hit game (special game state) in the big hit lottery of the first special symbol (special game determination) or the big hit lottery of the second special symbol (special game determination). It refers to the state in which the right to execute is acquired. The "big hit game (special game state)" refers to a game state in which a round game in which the big winning opening 50 is opened in a predetermined mode is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times or 15 times).

Although the maximum number of open times and the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 50 in each round game are predetermined, a predetermined number of game balls are set in the large winning opening 50 even before the maximum number of opening times and the maximum opening time are reached. When (for example, 9 pieces) wins (balls), one round game ends. That is, the "big hit game (special game state)" is an advantageous game state for the player who can easily obtain the prize ball. In this embodiment, it is possible to generate any of a plurality of types of jackpot games (special game states) having different degrees of advantage to the player.

The winning lottery of a normal symbol is a "hit" by acquiring a hit determination random value when the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 44 and comparing the acquired hit determination random value with the hit determination value. Corresponds to determining whether or not. When the winning lottery of the normal symbol is performed, the normal symbol display 62 displays the variation of the normal symbol, and after a predetermined time elapses, the stop display of the normal symbol indicating the lottery result is performed. That is, the stop display of the normal symbol is a notification of the lottery result.

The ordinary symbol display 62 is composed of one or a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs blink at predetermined intervals or in order in the variation display of the ordinary symbol. Then, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED is turned on in a mode (hit mode, loss mode) indicating the result of the winning lottery.

In addition, in this embodiment, "hit" means a state in which the right to execute a winning state (auxiliary game) is acquired in a winning lottery of ordinary symbols. The "hit game (auxiliary game)" refers to a game state in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a predetermined manner.

Although the maximum number of times of opening and the maximum opening time of the second starting port 47 in the winning game (auxiliary game) are predetermined, the second starting port 47 can be used even before the maximum number of opening times and the maximum opening time are reached. When a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 9) are won (winning), the winning game (auxiliary game) ends, that is, in the "winning game (auxiliary game)", the variation display of the second special symbol is likely to be executed. It is in a gaming state (the start condition of the variable display is easily satisfied). In this embodiment, a plurality of types of hit games (auxiliary games) having different degrees of advantage to the player are provided.

The first special symbol hold display 63 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is stored when a game ball wins (wins) in the first starting port 45. The jackpot lottery of the first special symbol (of the first special symbol). It is for displaying the number of rights (first reserved storage) for performing variable display), and is lit or blinks in a mode indicating the number of first reserved storage. It should be noted that although a maximum of four first hold storages are stored, the number may be less than or more than four.

The second special symbol hold indicator 64 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is stored when a game ball wins (wins) in the second starting port 47. The second special symbol jackpot lottery (of the second special symbol). It is for displaying the number of rights (second hold storage) for performing variable display), and is lit or blinks in a mode indicating the number of second hold storage. It should be noted that although a maximum of four second hold storages are stored, the number may be less than or more than four.

The normal symbol hold display 65 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and has the right to perform a winning lottery (variable display of the normal symbol) of the normal symbol stored when the game ball wins (passes) at the normal symbol gate 44. It is for displaying the number of (normal figure hold storage), and is lit or blinks in a mode indicating the number of normal figure hold storage. It should be noted that the maximum number of reserved storages for the normal figure is four, but the number may be less than or more than four.

The first special symbol display 60 and / or the second special symbol display 61 can also be configured by a 7-segment LED. For example, if you win the big hit lottery of a special symbol, "7" will be stopped and displayed, if it is lost, "-" will be stopped and displayed, and if it is in a variable display, it will be turned off and " It is advisable to repeat "-". Before the start of the variation display of the special symbol, the stop result of the previous variation display is displayed by turning on the LED, so when the variation display starts, the variation is displayed by starting from turning off the LED. This makes it easier to understand that the variable display has started.

A first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) composed of a liquid crystal display is provided in the back of the effect space 40a, and is below the effect space 40a and in front of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). A second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal display) composed of a liquid crystal display having a display area smaller than that of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) is provided, and a character's face is above the effect space 40a. A movable effect member 73 imitating the above is provided. In the present embodiment, the "first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display)" and the "second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal display)" may be collectively referred to as an "image display device".

The first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal display) perform various effect displays according to the progress of the game. As the effect display, a customer waiting demo effect executed when the special symbol variation display is not performed, a variation display of the effect symbol 70a executed when the special symbol variation display is performed, or a notice by a character. There is a production etc.

Further, the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal display) is driven by a solenoid, a motor, or the like while executing the variable display of the effect symbol 70a executed by the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display). It is possible to perform a movement effect by moving with the device 75 (see FIG. 2).

Specifically, the standby position (first position) located near the end (lower) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the center side (upper) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). The movement effect is performed by moving (raising, descending) in the vertical direction to and from the effect position (second position) located at. The moving direction of the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal display) may be the left-right direction or the front-back direction, or the moving effect may be performed by operating the effect button 17.

Further, in the display unit (effective display area) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display), three rows of variable display areas such as a left side area, a central area, and a right side area are formed, and each variable display area has three columns of variable display areas. By scrolling the displayed effect symbol 70a in the vertical direction (from top to bottom in the present embodiment), the effect symbol 70a is displayed in a variable manner.

The effect symbol 70a is composed of, for example, symbols showing numbers from "1" to "9", and is a variable display of the special symbol executed by the first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61. Corresponding to (synchronizing with), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is performed. That is, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started in response to the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is stopped in response to the stop of the variable display of the special symbol. The effect symbol 70a may be composed of a symbol indicating an alphabet such as "A" to "F", a symbol indicating a number, a symbol indicating an alphabet, and a symbol having a decorative property by combining a character image.

In the stop display of the effect symbol 70a, the effect symbol 70a is stopped for a predetermined time in a predetermined mode (missing mode, jackpot mode) indicating the result of the jackpot lottery. The jackpot mode (special result mode) is a combination of the same effect symbols such as "777" or a combination of regular effect symbols such as "213", and the loss mode is another mode. be. The mode of variable display of the effect symbol 70a is not limited to this, and may be scrolling in the left-right direction or rotating (rotating) on the spot.

During the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, various effect images such as reach effects, background images, characters, and movies are displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) and the second image according to the result of the jackpot lottery. By displaying the image on the device 71 (sub-liquid crystal display), the player's expectation for a big hit (hereinafter referred to as "big hit winning expectation") is increased.

Here, the reach effect gives the player a sense of expectation for winning the jackpot, such that a part of the combination of the effect symbols 70a for notifying the jackpot is temporarily stopped and the other effect symbols 70a fluctuate. It means a variation mode. For example, when a combination of three effect symbols 70a of "777" is set as a combination of effect symbols 70a for notifying a jackpot (big hit result mode), two effect symbols 70a are set to "7" in the left side region and the right side region. , Which means that the remaining effect symbol 70a is fluctuating in the central region after being temporarily stopped.

In addition, the temporary stop means that the effect symbol 70a sways slightly or the effect symbol 70a is deformed slightly to make the player appear as if the effect symbol 70a is stopped (not completely stopped). ) Say the aspect.

In this embodiment, there are four types of reach effects: "normal reach effect", "SP reach effect", "SPSP reach effect", and "full rotation reach effect".

In the normal reach effect, two effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in the left side area and the right side area, and the remaining one effect symbol 70a is changed in the center area while the background image before the normal reach effect is displayed. It is a reach production to do.

The SP reach effect is a movie (movie, movie) that has a longer time than the movie related to the normal reach effect, with two effect symbols 70a temporarily stopped in the left side area and the right side area, and the remaining one effect symbol 70a fluctuating in the center area. It is a reach production in which (animation, etc.) flows.

The SPSP reach effect is a longer time (feature) than the movie related to the SP reach effect, with two effect symbols 70a temporarily stopped in the left side area and the right side area, and the remaining one effect symbol 70a fluctuating in the central area. It is a reach production in which a movie (movie, animation, etc.) is played.

The full rotation reach effect is a reach effect that fluctuates at a low speed with all combinations of a plurality of effect symbols 70a for notifying a big hit. In this embodiment, it is a reach effect that is executed only when a big hit lottery is won.

In the present embodiment, the expectation of winning a big hit related to the reach effect is higher in the order of normal reach effect <SP reach effect <SPSP reach effect <full rotation reach effect (big hit confirmed).

Further, in order to display the number of first hold icons corresponding to the first special symbol hold number (U1), which is the current number of first hold storages, on the display unit of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). 1st hold icon display area 70B and a second hold icon display area 70D for displaying a number of second hold icons corresponding to the current number of second hold icons (U2). And, the icon display area 70C for displaying the icon (related) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a) being executed is formed.

The first hold icon display area 70B is partitioned from the side closer to the icon display area 70C in the form of a first display unit 70B1, a second display unit 70B2, a third display unit 70B3, a fourth display unit 70B4, and the like. The display units 70B1 to 70B4 display a number of first hold icons corresponding to the first special symbol hold number (U1). That is, the number of the first hold icons is increased or decreased in accordance with the increase or decrease of the first special symbol hold number (U1).

Specifically, the first display unit 70B1 displays the first hold icon H11 indicating the first hold storage in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed first, and the second display unit 70B2 displays 2 First, the first hold icon H12 indicating the first hold memory on which the variation display of the first special symbol is executed is displayed, and the variation display of the first special symbol is executed third on the third display unit 70B3. The first hold icon H13 indicating the first hold memory is displayed, and the first hold icon H14 showing the first hold memory on which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed is displayed on the fourth display unit 70B4. Will be done.

The second hold icon display area 70D is partitioned from the side closer to the icon display area 70C in the form of a first display unit 70D1, a second display unit 70D2, a third display unit 70D3, a fourth display unit 70D4, and the like. The display units 70D1 to 70D4 display a number of second hold icons corresponding to the second special symbol hold number (U2). That is, the number of the second hold icons corresponding to the increase / decrease in the number of the second special symbol hold (U2) is also increased / decreased.

Specifically, the first display unit 70D1 displays the second hold icon H21 indicating the second hold storage in which the variation display of the second special symbol is executed first, and the second display unit 70D2 displays 2 Second, the second hold icon H22 indicating the second hold memory on which the variation display of the second special symbol is executed is displayed, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed third on the third display unit 70D3. The second hold icon H23 indicating the second hold memory is displayed, and the second hold icon H24 showing the second hold memory in which the variation display of the second special symbol is executed fourth is displayed on the fourth display unit 70D4. Will be done. In the present embodiment, the "first special symbol hold number" may be referred to as the "first hold number", and the "second special symbol hold number" may be referred to as the "second hold number".

The icon display area 70C is the first hold icon or the second hold icon displayed on the first display unit 70B1 of the first hold icon display area 70B corresponding to the start of the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a). The icon TH is displayed by moving (shifting) the second hold icon displayed on the first display unit 70D1 of the display area 70D1, and the icon is displayed at the end of the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a). TH disappears (erases). The icon may be extinguished in the middle of the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a). In the present embodiment, the "first hold icon", the "second hold icon", and the "corresponding icon" may be collectively referred to as an "icon".

The movable effect member 73 emits light by a panel lighting device 74 having a plurality of lamps (LEDs and the like) during execution of variable display of the effect symbol 70a executed by the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display). It is possible to perform a light emitting effect, and it is possible to perform a movement effect by moving by a panel drive device 75 composed of a solenoid, a motor, or the like.

Specifically, the light emission effect is performed by emitting light of a plurality of lamps (LEDs and the like) with a predetermined light emission color according to the progress state of the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. Further, it is located at a standby position (first position) located near the end (upper side) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) and near the center (lower side) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display). The movement effect is performed by moving (raising, descending) in the vertical direction to and from the effect position (second position). It should be noted that the effect may be configured to perform a light emission effect or a movement effect by operating the effect button 17.

The back side of the game board mounting frame 3 and the game board 5 is supplied from a game ball payout device, island equipment, etc. for paying out the game ball based on the establishment of predetermined payout conditions (prize ball, ball lending). A game ball storage unit (not shown) that stores game balls and supplies them to the game ball payout device, a main control device (not shown) with a built-in main control board 110 that comprehensively controls the progress of the game, and a main control board. A payout control device (not shown) having a built-in payout control board 120 that controls the game ball payout device according to a payout control command from the 110, and an effect control according to an effect control command from the main control board 110. An effect control device with a built-in effect control board 130 (not shown), a power supply device with a built-in power supply board 160 that supplies power supply voltage to various control devices (not shown), and game information (not shown) outside the game machine 1. A game information output terminal plate 90 for outputting a game signal) is provided.

(Control configuration of gaming machine 1)
Next, the control configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a block diagram of the entire gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment.

The main control board 110 comprehensively controls the progress (basic operation) of the game. The main control board 110 is a main control one-chip microcomputer provided with a main CPU 110a for performing arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b in which a game control program and the like are stored, and a main RAM 110c (corresponding to a volatile storage means) serving as a work area during arithmetic processing. It is 110 m long and has an input port and an output port for main control. The main CPU 110a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the program stored in the main ROM 110b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the game while utilizing the main RAM 110c as a work area, thereby performing arithmetic processing related to the game, thereby controlling devices (various solenoids and various displays). The device) is controlled, and a predetermined command based on the result of arithmetic processing is transmitted to the payout control board 120, the effect control board 130, and the like.

Here, the communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 is configured so that commands (data) can be communicated in both directions, and the communication between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 is the main control board. The command (data) can be communicated in only one direction from the 110 to the effect control board 130.

The input port of the main control board 110 has a general winning opening detection switch 43a, a gate detection switch 44a, a first starting opening detection switch 45a, a second starting opening detection switch 47a, a large winning opening detection switch 50a, and a winning confirmation detection switch 52a. , Magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, RAM clear switch 55a, payout control board 120 and the like are connected. When detection signals from various detection switches and various detection sensors are input to the main control board 110 via the input port, control processing according to the detection signals is performed.

The output port of the main control board 110 has a second starting port opening / closing solenoid 48b, a winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b, a first special symbol display 60, a second special symbol display 61, a normal symbol display 62, and a first special. The symbol hold indicator 63, the second special symbol hold indicator 64, the normal symbol hold indicator 65, the round number indicator 66, the right-handed display 67, the game information output terminal board 90, the effect control board 130, etc. are connected. There is. A game in which a drive control signal for controlling various solenoids, a display control signal for controlling various indicators, and a game information output terminal board 90 notify the outside of the game machine 1 (hall computer, etc.) via an output port. Information etc. are output.

The payout control board 120 is a secondary control board that controls the payout of the game ball based on the reception of the payout command from the main control board 110 and also controls the launch of the game ball. The payout control board 120 includes a payout control unit 121 that drives the game ball payout device to control the payout of the game ball, and a launch control unit 122 that drives the game ball launcher 26 to control the launch of the game ball.

The payout control unit 121 includes a payout CPU 121a that performs arithmetic processing, a payout ROM 121b in which a payout program and the like are stored, a payout RAM 121c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an input port and an output port for payout control, and the like. The payout CPU 121a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, performs arithmetic processing related to payout of the game ball while utilizing the payout RAM 121c as a work area, and controls the game ball payout device. Or, a predetermined command based on the result of arithmetic processing is transmitted to the main control board 110, the effect control board 130, and the like.

An open detection switch 31a, a saucer full detection switch 32a, a payout ball detection switch 100a provided in the game ball payout device, a ball presence detection switch 101a provided in the game ball storage unit 101, and the like are connected to the input port of the payout control unit 121. The payout motor 100b provided in the game ball payout device is connected to the output port of the payout control unit 121.

When the payout control unit 121 receives a payout command from the main control board 110, the payout control unit 121 drives a payout motor 100b provided in the game ball payout device to perform control to pay out a predetermined number of game balls, and is predetermined by the payout ball detection switch 100a. When the payout of the number of game balls is detected, the control of paying out the game balls is terminated.

The launch control unit 122 includes a control circuit, an input port, an output port, and the like. A touch sensor 15a and a firing volume 15b are connected to the input port of the firing control unit 122, and a ball feed solenoid 11b, a firing solenoid 28b, and the like are connected to the output port of the firing control unit 122.

When the launch control unit 122 detects that the player's hand is touching the launch handle 15 by the touch signal input from the touch sensor 15a, the launch control unit 122 allows the ball feed solenoid 11b and the launch solenoid 28b to be energized and launches. When it is detected that the rotation angle of the firing handle 15 has changed due to the detection signal from the volume 15b, the ball feed solenoid 11b is driven and the firing solenoid has a firing strength so that the firing handle 15 has a firing strength according to the rotation angle. 28b is driven to launch a game ball.

The launching solenoid 28b is composed of a rotary solenoid, and a launching member 28 is directly connected to a rotating shaft. When the rotating shaft rotates, the launching member 28 rotates to launch a game ball. Since the operation of the launch solenoid 28b is set to about 99.9 (times / minute) from the frequency based on the output cycle of the crystal oscillator provided in the launch control unit 122, the launch of the game ball in one minute. The number is about 99.9 (pieces / minute). That is, the game ball is fired about every 0.6 seconds.

The effect control board 130 is a slave control board (subordinate control means) that controls the effect related to the game based on the reception of the effect command from the main control board 110. The effect control board 130 includes a sub CPU 130a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub ROM 130b that stores an effect control program, an effect control unit 130m that includes a sub RAM 130c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and a first image display device 70 (main). Liquid crystal display), second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal display), display / sound control unit 140 that controls the sound output device 9 (speaker), frame lighting device 74, handle light emitting device 15c, button drive motor 17b, blower. It includes a lamp / drive control unit 150c that controls the device 21, a panel lighting device 74, a panel drive device 75, and the like, and an input port and an output port for effect control.

The sub CPU 130a receives an operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out a game program stored in the sub ROM 130b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the production while utilizing the sub RAM 130c as a work area, thereby receiving a command received from the main control board 110. Controls are performed to cause various control units (display / voice control unit 140, lamp / drive control unit 150) to execute various effects in response to input signals from the effect button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a. (Output data and commands).

An effect button detection switch 17a, a cross key detection switch 19a, and the like are connected to the input port of the effect control board 130. On the effect control board 130, an effect button detection signal indicating that the effect button 17 has been operated is input from the effect button detection switch 17a, or a cross key detection indicating that the cross key 19 has been operated from the effect key detection switch 19a is detected. When a signal (up button detection signal, left button detection signal, down button detection signal, right button detection signal) is input, processing is performed to execute an effect according to the detection signal.

The display / voice control unit 140 receives a command from the effect control unit 130m and controls the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal display) to display a predetermined image. Or, control is performed so that the voice output device 9 outputs a predetermined voice.

The display / audio control unit 140 includes a centralized CPU 142 that performs arithmetic processing, an integrated ROM 143 that stores an integrated control program, an integrated control unit 141 that has an integrated RAM 144 that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and VDP as an image processor ( An image control unit 145 composed of a Video Display Processor), a CGROM 146 in which image data and the like are stored, and a frame buffer and the like provided inside the image control unit 145 and temporarily storing drawing data generated from the image data. It includes a VRAM 147, a voice control unit 148 as a voice processor, a voice ROM 149 in which voice data and the like are stored, an input / output port, and the like.

The control CPU 142 receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the display control program stored in the control ROM 143, performs arithmetic processing related to the effect while utilizing the control RAM 144 as a work area, and receives the command from the effect control unit 130 m. Controls the image control unit 145 and the voice control unit 148 to execute various effects (outputs data and commands) in response to an effect instruction command or the like.

The general ROM 143 is composed of a mask ROM or the like, and displays a display control program for displaying an image, a display list generation program for generating a display list composed of drawing control commands, and an animation of an effect pattern. The animation pattern, animation scene information, etc. for the purpose are stored.

This animation pattern is referred to when displaying an animation constituting a specific content of an effect by an image, and the animation pattern is associated with animation scene information, a display order of each animation scene, and the like. The animation scene information includes weight frames (display time), target data (sprite identification number, transfer source address, etc.), drawing parameters (sprite display position, display magnification, transparency, etc.), drawing method. , The duty ratio which is a parameter of the brightness of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) is included.

The image control unit 145 (VDP) is connected to a CGROM 146 that stores various image data, and is stored in the CGROM 146 and commands (display list, drawing command, etc.) from the general control unit 141 (general CPU 142). The drawing data that is the source of the video signal (RGB signal, etc.) is generated based on the image data. The image data includes an image (frame) to be displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal), for example, an effect symbol image, a background image constituting the background of the effect symbol, a character image, and the like. It is material data that represents an individual image such as a dialogue image. On the other hand, the drawing data is synthetic data representing an image of the entire frame composed of composite (superimposed) individual images.

The CGROM 146 is composed of a flash memory, EEPROM, EPROM, a mask ROM, etc., and compresses and stores image data (sprites, movies), etc., which are a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32 × 32 pixels). ing. The pixel information is composed of color number information that specifies a color number for each pixel and an α value that indicates the transparency of the image. The CGROM 146 is read out in image data units by the image control unit 145 (VDP), and image processing is performed in image data units of this frame.

Further, the CGROM 146 stores the palette data in which the color number information for designating the color number and the display color information for actually displaying the color are associated with each other without compression. The CGROM 146 may be configured to compress only a part of the image data without compressing all the image data. Further, as the movie compression method, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used.

The VRAM 147 is composed of an SRAM having a high speed of writing or reading image data. The VRAM 147 is a display list storage area for temporarily storing a display list output from the control unit 141 (control CPU 142), a first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) and a second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal display). It has a frame buffer area and the like corresponding to.

This frame buffer area is a storage area for drawing or displaying an image, and further has a first frame buffer area and a second frame buffer area. The first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area are alternately switched between the "drawing frame buffer" and the "display frame buffer" at each start of drawing.

Therefore, the image control unit 145 (VDP) uses the drawing data stored in the CGROM 146 as a "drawing frame buffer" in the frame buffer area of the VRAM 147 based on the instruction (display list) from the control unit 141 (control CPU 142). The drawing data is read from the "display frame buffer" in the frame buffer area, a video signal (RGB signal, etc.) is generated based on the read drawing data, and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and It is output to the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) to display various images.

An operating clock is supplied to the image control unit 145 (VDP) from the crystal oscillator, and by dividing the operating clock, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) and the second image display device 71 are supplied. A synchronization signal (horizontal synchronization signal / vertical synchronization signal) for synchronizing with the (sub liquid crystal) is generated and output to the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). In the present embodiment, the frame rate of the image control unit 145 (VDP) is 30 fps (1/30 second = about 33 ms) so that drawing (image display) is performed 30 times per second. It may be set to 60 fps (1/60 second = about 16.6 ms) so that drawing (image display) is performed 60 times per second.

Further, between the image control unit 145 (VDP) and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal display), image data is converted into a predetermined image format and output. The general-purpose board 72 is connected. The general-purpose board 72 has a bridge function for converting into an image format corresponding to the performance of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal display) for displaying image data, for example. , Absorbs the difference in resolution between when a 19-inch liquid crystal display device of SXGA (1280 dots x 1080 dots) is connected and when a 17-inch liquid crystal display device of XGA (1024 dots x 768 dots) is connected. ..

The voice control unit 148 is connected to the voice output device 9, and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) and the second image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) and the second are based on various effect data (including commands) transmitted from the effect control unit 130 m. Control is performed to output audio data, music data (BGM, SE), etc. from the audio output device 9 in accordance with the display of the image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal display).

The lamp / drive control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a that performs arithmetic processing, a lamp ROM 150b that stores a lamp / drive control program, a lamp RAM 150c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an input / output port, and the like.

The lamp CPU 150a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the lamp / drive control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the effect while utilizing the lamp RAM 150c as a work area, thereby performing arithmetic processing related to the effect from the effect control unit 130 m. In response to the received effect instruction command or the like, control (outputting data or commands) is performed to cause a controlled device such as various lighting devices or various drive devices to perform a predetermined effect.

A frame lighting device 10, a handle light emitting device 15c, a button drive motor 17b, a blower device 21, a panel lighting device 74, and a panel drive device 75 are connected to the input / output ports of the lamp / drive control unit 150. Based on various effect data (including commands) transmitted from the effect control unit 130 m (sub CPU 130a), lighting control of various LEDs of the frame lighting device 10, the handle light emitting device 15c, and the panel lighting device 74 is performed. The light emitting effect and the like are performed, and the operation effect (the above-mentioned movement effect) and the like are performed by controlling the drive of the drive source such as the motor and the solenoid of the button drive motor 17b, the blower device 21 and the panel drive device 75.

The power supply board 160 generates a main power supply (operating power supply) necessary for the operation of the gaming machine 1 from a power supply supplied from the outside of the gaming machine 1, and uses the main power supply as the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board). 120, production control board 130 and various electronic components). The power supply board 160 has a power failure detection circuit 162 that detects whether or not a power failure (power failure) has occurred and outputs a power failure detection signal to the main control board 110 based on the occurrence of the power failure (power failure), and a power supply. A backup power supply circuit 163 for supplying backup power to the main control board 110 in the event of a power failure (power failure) is provided.

Further, the power supply board 160 is for switching between an ON state in which the main power is supplied to the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, effect control board 130, and various electronic components) and an OFF state in which the main power is stopped. It is equipped with a power switch, and when the power switch is turned on, the main power supply is started and the operation of the gaming machine 1 is started. Even if the power switch is in the OFF state, the supply of the backup power supply to the main control board 110 is maintained.

The power failure detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine 1, and outputs a power failure detection signal to the main control board 110 when the power supply voltage becomes a predetermined value or less. More specifically, when the power failure detection signal reaches a high level, the main CPU 110a is in an operable state, and when the power failure detection signal becomes a low level, the main CPU 10a is in an operation stopped state.

The backup power supply circuit 163 includes a capacitor that stores electricity when the game machine 1 is energized, and when a power failure (power failure) occurs, the backup power supply voltage stored in the capacitor is applied to the main RAM 110c of the main control board 110. And supply. As a result, the stored contents of the main RAM 110c and the payout RAM 121c are retained even when the power is cut off (power failure), and the control state of the game is changed to the state before the power cut (power failure) after the recovery from the power failure (power failure). It can be restored. The backup power may be supplied to the payout control board 120 and the effect control board 130.

(Explanation of game status)
Next, the game state when the game progresses will be described. In the present embodiment, the state relating to the jackpot lottery of the special symbol has a "low probability gaming state" and the "high probability gaming state", and the state relating to the movable member 48 having the second starting port 47 is a "non-time saving game". It has a "state" and a "time saving game state".

In this embodiment, the following three gaming states are provided.
(1) Low-probability non-time-saving gaming state that is "low-probability gaming state" and "non-time-saving gaming state" (2) Low-probability time-saving gaming state that is "low-probability gaming state" and "time-saving gaming state" (3) " High-probability time-saving game state that is both "high-probability game state" and "time-saving game state"

The gaming state when the game is started, that is, the initial gaming state of the gaming machine 1, is set to the "low probability non-time saving gaming state", and this gaming state is set to the "normal gaming state" in the present embodiment. I will call it. In the present embodiment, the "low-accuracy time-shortening game state" and the "high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state" may be referred to as "specific gaming states" because they are more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. be.

In the present embodiment, the "low probability gaming state" means the winning probability of a big hit in a big hit lottery of a special symbol performed on the condition that a game ball enters the first starting port 45 or the second starting opening 47. However, for example, it means a gaming state set as low as 1/299. On the other hand, in the "high probability gaming state", the winning probability of the jackpot is improved as compared with the low probability gaming state, and the winning probability of the jackpot is set as high as, for example, 1 / 59.8. Say. Therefore, in the "high-probability gaming state", it is easier to win the jackpot than in the "low-probability gaming state". It should be noted that the change from the low-probability gaming state to the high-probability gaming state is performed after the jackpot game is completed.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot that triggers the transition to the high-probability gaming state is referred to as "probability variation jackpot". In addition, the jackpot that triggers the transition to the low-probability gaming state is called "normal jackpot".

In the present embodiment, the "non-time saving game state" is a change in the average of the normal symbols corresponding to the lottery result in the winning lottery of the normal symbols performed on the condition that the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 44. It refers to a game state in which the time is set longer than the "time saving game state", and the opening time of the second starting port 47 when a winner is won is set short. For example, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 44, a winning lottery for the normal symbol is performed, and the normal symbol display 62 displays the fluctuation of the normal symbol. For example, the stop display is displayed after 30 seconds. Then, when the lottery result is a hit, the second start port 47 is controlled in the open mode for, for example, 0.2 seconds after the stop display of the normal symbol.

On the other hand, the "time saving game state" is the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result in the winning lottery of the normal symbol performed on the condition that the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 44. Is set shorter than the "non-time saving game state", and the opening time of the second starting port 47 when winning is set to be, for example, 2.5 seconds, which is longer than the "non-time saving game state". The state. Further, in the "non-time saving game state", the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is set as low as 1/128, for example, and in the "time saving game state", the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is 127/128. Set high. Therefore, in the "time-saving game state", when the game ball passes through the normal drawing gate 44, the second starting port 47 is more likely to be controlled in the open mode than in the "non-time-saving game state". As a result, in the "short-time game state", the player can advantageously advance the game without consuming the game ball.

In addition, in the embodiment, in the "time saving game state", the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery are more advantageous than in the "non-time saving gaming state". Is set to. However, the "time saving game state" may be set so that only one of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is advantageous. Further, in the non-time saving game state, the probability of winning in the winning lottery of the normal symbol may be, for example, 0/128.

(Type of jackpot)
Next, the types of jackpots will be described.

In the present embodiment, "first jackpot", "second jackpot", and "third jackpot" are selected as the types of jackpots that can be won in the jackpot lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45. It has "first jackpot" and "second jackpot" as the types of jackpots that can be won in the jackpot lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 47.

The "first big hit" is to execute the first big hit game in which the big winning opening 50 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds and then the big winning opening 50 is closed for 2 seconds up to 10 times. It's a big hit. In the round game, if a specified number (for example, 10) of game balls wins in the large winning opening 50 even before the opening time elapses, one round game ends.

After the end of the first big hit game, the high-accuracy time-saving game state is set until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed 10,000 times. Therefore, from the jackpot winning probability in the high probability gaming state, the next jackpot is substantially determined.

The "second jackpot" is a jackpot that executes a second jackpot game in which a round game is executed up to 10 times. After the end of the second big hit game, the game is set to a low-probability time-saving game state until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed 100 times.

The "third jackpot" is a jackpot that executes a third jackpot game in which a round game is executed up to four times. After the end of the third big hit game, the high-accuracy time-saving game state is set until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed 10,000 times. Therefore, from the jackpot winning probability in the high probability gaming state, the next jackpot is substantially determined.

The number of variable display times (100 times, 10,000 times) of the specific game state (high-probability short-time game state, low-probability short-time game state) set after the end of the big hit game is referred to as "high probability number of times" or "time reduction number of times". May be expressed.

In the present embodiment, the number of types of jackpots is three, but the number is not limited to three, and may be less than or more than three. Further, the opening time of the opening / closing member 51 of the big winning opening 50 is set to 29.5 seconds for any of the first to third big hits, but the opening time does not have to be 29.5 seconds. The opening time may differ depending on the round game.

(Type of hit)
Next, the types of hits will be described.

In the present embodiment, there are "first hit" and "second hit" as the types of hits that can be won in the winning lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the normal symbol, and the normal symbol If the game state when the winning lottery is executed is a non-time-saving game state, it is a "first hit", and if it is a time-saving game state, it is a "second hit".

The "first hit" is a hit in which the first hit game in which the second starting port 47 is opened for a maximum of 0.2 seconds is executed. That is, it is a hit game in which the movable member 48 is opened once.

The "second hit" is a hit in which the second start opening 47 is opened for 2.6 seconds, then closed for 1.5 seconds, and then opened again for 2.6 seconds. .. That is, it is a hit game in which the movable member 48 is opened twice.

In the first hit game and the second hit game, the hit game ends when a specified number (for example, 10) of game balls wins in the large winning opening 50 even before the opening time elapses.

In this way, in the "time-saving game state", the game ball is easily won in the second starting port 47, and the player has an advantage in the game without consuming the game ball, as compared with the "non-time-saving game state". It is possible to proceed.

Next, the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to a flowchart. In addition, Si (i = 10, 20 ...) Indicates a step.

(Main processing of main control board)
The main process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the main control board 110.

When the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the main CPU 110a, and the main CPU 110a performs the following main processing.

First, the main CPU 110a performs an initialization process in S10. Specifically, when the power is turned on, the boot program is read from the main ROM 110b, and the flag stored in the main RAM 110c is initialized.

In S20, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the reach determination random value and the special symbol determination random value for determining the variation mode (variation time) of the special symbol, and in S30, the jackpot determination initial value random value. , Initial value for special symbol determination Random value, initial value for hit determination Random value and initial value for normal symbol determination Random value Update processing is performed.

Next, the main CPU 110a determines in S40 whether or not a power failure (power failure) has occurred. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a power failure detection signal has been input from the power failure detection circuit of the power supply board 160, and if the power failure detection signal has not been input, the process proceeds to S20 and the power failure detection signal. Is input, the process proceeds to S41.

The main CPU 110a sets interrupt prohibition prohibiting timer interruption in S41, performs a process of clearing the output port in S42, calculates a checksum of the main RAM 110c in S43, and stores it in a predetermined storage area. In S44, a process to turn on the backup flag to be referred to when recovering from a power failure is performed, and in S45, a process to prohibit RAM access is performed, and the process waits until the power supply voltage supply is completely cut off. ..

(Timer interrupt processing on the main control board)
The timer interrupt process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed at a predetermined cycle (4 milliseconds) on the main control board 110.

First, in S100, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register in the stack area, and in S110, updates the special symbol time counter, the opening time of the special electric accessory, and the like. , The time control process for updating various timer counters such as the update process of the normal symbol time counter and the update process of the opening / closing time of the movable member 48 is performed. Specifically, a process of subtracting 1 from counters such as a special symbol time counter, a special game timer counter, a normal symbol time counter, and a start port closing timer counter is performed.

In S120, the main CPU 110a includes a random value for jackpot determination, a random value for determining a special symbol, a random value for determining a special symbol variation pattern, a random value for hit determination, a random value for determining a normal symbol, and a random value for determining a normal symbol variation pattern. Performs specific random value update processing. Specifically, the random number counters that cover each random number value are added by +1 and updated. If the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter makes one round), the random number counter is returned to 0, and when the random number counter returns to the initial value of the round, it corresponds. Initial value to be set The random number value is set as a new lap initial value and the random number value is newly updated.

Similar to S30, the main CPU 110a updates the initial value random value for big hit determination, the initial value random value for special symbol determination, the initial value random value for hit determination, and the initial value random value for normal symbol determination in S130. Performs random value update processing.

In S200, the main CPU 110a includes various types such as a general winning opening detection switch 43a, a large winning opening detection switch 50a, a first starting opening detection switch 45a, a second starting opening detection switch 47a, a gate detection switch 44a, and a winning confirmation detection switch 52a. It is determined whether or not there is an input to the switch, and if there is an input, input control processing for setting predetermined data is performed.

In S300, the main CPU 110a performs special symbol special electric control processing for performing special symbol memory determination (big hit determination, etc.), special symbol display control, opening / closing control of the big winning opening 50 (opening / closing member 51), game state control, and the like. I do.

In S400, the main CPU 110a performs a normal symbol memory control process (such as a hit determination), a normal symbol display control, an opening / closing control of a second starting port 47 (movable member 48), and the like.

Next, in S500, the main CPU 110a transmits a payout state confirmation designation command for confirming the payout state of the payout control board 120 to the payout control board 120, or a prize ball counter (3 prize ball counter, 10 prizes). With reference to a ball counter (15 prize ball counters), a payout control process for transmitting a payout number designation command corresponding to various winning openings to the payout control board 120 is performed. As a result, the payout control board 120 executes control for paying out the prize balls from the game ball payout device.

In S600, the main CPU 110a determines the occurrence of a magnetic abnormality or a radio wave abnormality based on the input signals from the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a, and produces an error designation command for a magnetic abnormality or an error designation command for a radio wave abnormality. Performs magnetic / radio wave abnormality determination processing for transmission to the control board 130. When the effect control board 130 receives the magnetic anomaly error designation command or the radio wave abnormality designation command, it controls to perform the magnetic anomaly error notification and the radio wave abnormality error notification.

In S700, the main CPU 110a has external information data (game information) output from the game information output terminal plate 90, starting port opening / closing data output to the second starting port opening / closing solenoid 48b, and a large winning prize output to the winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b. Mouth opening / closing data, special symbol display data to be output to the first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display data to be output to the normal symbol display 62, the first special symbol hold indicator 63 and the first. 2 Performs data creation processing for creating data such as special symbol hold display data to be output to the special symbol hold display 64 and normal symbol hold display data to be output to the normal symbol hold display 65.

In S800, the main CPU 110a performs port output processing for outputting signals such as external information data, start opening opening / closing data, and large winning opening opening / closing data created in S700, special symbol display data, normal symbol display data, and special symbol hold display. Display output processing to output signals such as data and normal symbol hold display data, payout command transmission processing to send commands set in the payout transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the payout control board 120, and payout command transmission processing of the main RAM 110c. An output control process for executing an effect command transmission process for transmitting a command set in the effect transmission data storage area to the effect control board 130 is performed.

The types of commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9.

In S900, the main CPU 110a returns the information saved in S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a, and ends the timer interrupt processing this time.

(Input control processing of the main control board)
The input control process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an input control process on the main control board 110.

The main CPU 110a performs a general winning opening detection switch input process in S210. In this general winning opening detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal is input from the general winning opening detection switch 43a, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the general winning opening 43. If there is no detection signal input from the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the process is transferred to S220.

When the detection signal is input from the general prize opening detection switch 43a, the data indicating 10 prize balls is added to the prize ball counter (10 prize ball counter) for the general winning opening used for the prize balls and updated. Then, "1" is added to the winning ball counter (D) indicating the number of game balls entered in the winning opening to update (D ← D + 1), and then the general winning opening detection switch input process is terminated.

The main CPU 110a performs a large winning opening detection switch input process in S220. In this big winning opening detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal is input from the big winning opening detection switch 50a, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the big winning opening 50. If there is no detection signal input from the large winning opening detection switch 50a, the process is transferred to S230.

When the detection signal is input from the large prize opening detection switch 50a, the data indicating 15 prize balls is added to the prize ball counter (15 prize ball counters) for the large prize opening used for the prize balls and updated. Then, "1" is added to the prize ball counter (D) indicating the number of game balls entered in the prize opening to update (D ← D + 1), and whether or not the current game state is in the special game state. To judge. When the current gaming state is a special gaming state, "1" is added to the round winning counter (C) for counting the game balls won in the large winning opening 50 and updated (C ← C + 1). Grand prize opening detection switch Ends the input process.

If the current game state is not in the special game state, an illegal winning ball indicating the number of game balls that have won (winned) in the specific winning opening (second starting opening 47, large winning opening 50) outside the winning period. "1" is added to the counter (E) and updated (E ← E + 1), and it is determined whether or not the value of the illegal winning ball counter (E) is larger than the specified number (for example, 10), and the illegal winning is won. When the value of the ball counter (E) is equal to or less than the specified number, the large winning opening detection switch input process is terminated.

If the value of the illegal winning ball counter (E) is larger than the specified number, it is assumed that an illegal winning (illegal winning) has occurred in which the game ball wins (wins) outside the winning period, and an error for illegal winning is specified. Set the command in the transmission data storage area for production. As a result, the error designation command for illegal winning is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 notifies that the illegal winning error has occurred to notify that the illegal winning has occurred.

Then, external information data (output data) for outputting an illegal winning signal from the game information output terminal plate 90 is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and the illegal winning ball counter (E) is cleared to detect a large winning opening. The switch input process ends. As a result, the illegal winning signal is output from the game information output terminal plate 90, and it becomes possible to grasp (specify) that the illegal winning has occurred in the external device.

The main CPU 110a performs the first start port detection switch input process in S230. In this first start port detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 45a is input, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the first start port 45.

The main CPU 110a performs the second start port detection switch input process in S240. In this second start port detection switch input process, substantially the same process as the first start port detection switch input process is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs a gate detection switch input process in S250. In this gate detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the gate detection switch 44a has been input, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal gate 44. If the detection signal from the gate detection switch 44a has not been input, the gate detection switch input process is terminated.

When the detection signal from the gate detection switch 44a is input, it is determined whether or not the number of normal map reservations, which is the number of normal symbol hold storages stored in the normal symbol hold storage area, is less than four. If the number of reserved figures is not less than 4, the gate detection switch input process is terminated.

If the number of holdings of the normal figure is less than 4, "1" is added to the number of holdings of the normal figure and updated, and the random value for hit judgment, the random value for determining the normal symbol, and the random value for determining the normal symbol fluctuation pattern are added. Acquired, the vacant storage unit is searched in order from the first storage unit in the normal symbol reservation storage area, the acquired random number value is stored in the vacant storage unit, and the gate detection switch input process is terminated.

The main CPU 110a performs a winning confirmation detection switch input process in S260. In this winning confirmation detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the winning confirmation detection switch 52a is input, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed through the winning ball flow path. If the detection signal from the winning confirmation detection switch 52a has not been input, the input control process ends.

When the detection signal from the winning confirmation detection switch 52a is input, the winning ball counter (D) is subtracted by "1" and updated (D ← D-1), and the value of the winning ball counter (D) is the upper limit value. It is determined whether or not it is within the range of (for example, 20) and the lower limit value (for example, -10).

If the value of the winning ball counter (D) does not fall within the range between the upper limit value and the lower limit value, it is assumed that an abnormal winning (winning ball) has occurred and an error designation command for abnormal winning is sent to the transmission data storage area for production. Set, set the external information data (output data) for outputting the abnormal winning signal from the game information output terminal board 90 in the predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, clear the winning ball counter (D), and clear the winning confirmation detection switch. End the input process. The sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the error designation command for abnormal winning is notified of the abnormal winning error to notify that the abnormal winning has occurred.

(First start port detection switch input process on the main control board)
The first start port detection switch input process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing a first start port detection switch input process on the main control board 110.

The main CPU 110a determines in S230-1 whether or not the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 45a is input. When the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 45a is input, the process is transferred to S230-2, and when the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 45a is not input, the first in the near sea. Start port detection switch Ends the input process.

In S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding and updating data indicating three prize balls to the three prize ball counter used for the prize balls, and in S230-3, wins a prize (winning ball) in the winning opening. "1" is added to the winning ball counter (D) indicating the number of game balls to be updated (D ← D + 1).

In S230-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the number of first special symbol reservations (U1), which is the number of first reserved storages stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area, is less than four. If the number of first special symbol reservations (U1) is less than 4, the process is transferred to S230-5, and if the number of first special symbol reservations (U1) is not less than 4, the first start port of this time. The detection switch input process ends.

In S230-5, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding "1" to the first special symbol hold number (U1) and updating (U1 ← U1 + 1), and in S230-6, the updated first special symbol hold. The first special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the number (U1) is set in the transmission data storage area for effect.

In S230-7, the main CPU 110a acquires special symbol determination information (big hit determination random value, special symbol determination random value, reach determination random value, special symbol variation pattern determination random value), and the first special symbol. The vacant storage unit is searched in order from the first storage unit in the reserved storage area, and the acquired special figure determination information is stored in the vacant storage unit.

As described above, the special symbol determination information (big hit determination random value, special symbol determination random value, reach determination random value, special symbol variation pattern determination random value) is stored in the predetermined storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area. ) Will be stored in the first hold memory.

The main CPU 110a performs the first pre-determination process in S230-8. In this first pre-judgment process, the pre-judgment table (not shown) is referred to, and the special figure judgment information (first hold storage) acquired this time is displayed before the variation display of the special symbol based on the judgment information is performed. Judgment is made, and the scheduled fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern to be executed, is determined.

In S230-9, the main CPU 110a sets the first start opening winning designation command corresponding to the scheduled fluctuation pattern determined in the first pre-determination process of S230-8 in the transmission data storage area for production, and this time, the first one. Start port detection switch Ends the input process.

As a result, the scheduled fluctuation pattern can be transmitted to the effect control board 130 as the first start port prize designation command, and the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the first start port prize designation command receives the first start port prize. The designated command is analyzed, and a predetermined look-ahead notice effect is performed over one or more variable displays executed before the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the first start opening winning designated command is started. Can be executed. The look-ahead notice effect is performed by using one or more of the image display devices 70 and 71, the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10, the movable effect member 73, and the board lighting device 74.

Regarding the second start port detection switch input process, the first start port detection switch 45a, the first special symbol hold storage area, the first hold storage, the first special symbol hold number (U1), and the first special symbol storage designation. The command, the first pre-judgment process, and the first start port winning designation command are executed by the second start port detection switch 47a, the second special symbol hold storage area, the second hold storage, the second special symbol hold number (U2), and the first. 2 It may be read as a special symbol memory designation command, a second pre-judgment process, and a second start opening winning designation command.

(Special figure special electric control processing of main control board)
The special figure special electric control process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 7. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing a special figure special electric control process in the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a loads the special figure special electric processing data in S301, refers to the branch destination address from the loaded special figure special electric processing data in S302, and determines the special symbol storage if the special figure special electric processing data = 0. The processing is transferred to the processing (S310), the processing is transferred to the special symbol variation processing (S320) if the special symbol special electric processing data = 1, and the processing is performed to the special symbol stop processing (S330) if the special symbol special electric processing data = 2. If the special figure special electric processing data = 3, the processing is transferred to the jackpot game processing (S340), and if the special figure special electric processing data = 4, the processing is transferred to the jackpot game end processing.

This "special figure special electric processing data" is set as necessary in each subroutine of the special figure special electric control processing as described later, so that the subroutine necessary for the game is appropriately processed. ..

In S310, the main CPU 110a performs a special symbol storage determination process of determining a jackpot, determining the type of special symbol to be stopped and displaying, and determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol.

Specifically, first, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second special symbol hold number (U2) is "1" or more, and when the second special symbol hold number (U2) is not "1" or more. In, it is determined whether or not the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is "1" or more, and when the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is not "1" or more ("0"). Determines whether or not the customer waiting state determination flag for determining whether or not the variable display of the special symbol and the start of the customer waiting state in which the jackpot game is not executed is "0".

When the customer waiting state determination flag is "0", it is assumed that the customer waiting state has started, the customer waiting state specification command is set in the transmission data storage area for production, and the special figure special electric processing data = 0 is maintained. If the customer waiting status determination flag is not "0" after the current special symbol memory determination processing is completed, it is assumed that the customer waiting status has already started, and the special symbol special electric processing = 0 is maintained. The symbol memory determination process is terminated.

When the number of second special symbol reservations (U2) is "1" or more, "1" is subtracted from the value stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area, and then the second special symbol reservation storage area is stored. Various random value values (special figure determination information) stored in a certain first storage unit to the fourth storage unit are shifted to the previous storage unit, and the number corresponding to the second special symbol hold number (U2) after subtraction is obtained. 2 Set the special symbol storage specification command in the transmission data storage area for production.

Then, the main CPU 110a makes a jackpot determination for determining whether or not to execute the jackpot game. Specifically, among various random value values (special symbol determination information) shifted from the first storage unit to the 0th storage unit in the second special symbol reservation storage area, the special symbol determination random value and the current stochastic gaming state. Based on (low-probability gaming state, high-probability gaming state), it is determined whether the jackpot game is a "big hit" or a "loss".

On the other hand, when the second special symbol hold number (U2) is not "1" or more and the first special symbol hold number (U1) is "1" or more, the first special symbol hold storage area is stored. After subtracting "1" from the stored value, various random value stored in the first to fourth storage units in the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the previous storage unit. The first special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) after subtraction is set in the transmission data storage area for effect.

Then, the main CPU 110a makes a jackpot determination for determining whether or not to execute the jackpot game. Specifically, among various random value values (special symbol determination information) shifted from the first storage unit to the 0th storage unit in the first special symbol reservation storage area, the special symbol determination random value and the current stochastic gaming state. Based on (low-probability gaming state, high-probability gaming state), it is determined whether the jackpot game is a "big hit" or a "loss".

Then, the main CPU 110a performs a special symbol determination process for determining the type of the special symbol to be stopped and displayed. Specifically, when the jackpot determination is performed based on the random value for determining the special symbol stored in the 0th storage unit of the 2nd special symbol reservation storage area, it is stored in the 0th storage unit. The jackpot special symbol or the loss special symbol is determined based on the random value for the jackpot symbol, and the effect symbol designation command corresponding to the determined special symbol is set in the effect transmission data storage area.

Further, when the jackpot determination is performed based on the random value for determining the special symbol stored in the 0th storage unit of the 1st special symbol reservation storage area, the jackpot symbol stored in the 0th storage unit is used. A special symbol (big hit special symbol, loss special symbol) is determined based on the random number value, and the effect symbol designation command corresponding to the determined special symbol is set in the effect transmission data storage area.

Next, the main CPU 110a performs a special symbol variation pattern determination process for determining a variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol. Specifically, when the jackpot determination is performed based on the random value for determining the special symbol stored in the 0th storage unit of the 2nd special symbol reservation storage area, it is stored in the 0th storage unit. The variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the reach determination random value and the special symbol variation random value, and the variation pattern specification command corresponding to the determined variation pattern is set in the effect transmission data storage area.

Further, when the jackpot determination is performed based on the random value for determining the special symbol stored in the 0th storage unit of the 1st special symbol reservation storage area, the reach determination is stored in the 0th storage unit. The fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the random value and the random value for special symbol variation, and the variation pattern designation command corresponding to the determined variation pattern is set in the transmission data storage area for production.

Then, the main CPU 110a sets the variation display data for causing the first special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61 to display the variation of the special symbol (blinking of the LED) in the predetermined processing area.

As a result, when the variable display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the data for turning on or off the LED is appropriately created, and the created data is output in the S700, so that the first special symbol display 60 Alternatively, the variable display of the second special symbol display 61 is performed.

Then, the special symbol special electric processing data = 0 is set to the special symbol special electric processing data = 1, and preparations are made to move to the subroutine of the special symbol variation processing, and the current special symbol storage determination processing is completed.

In S320, the main CPU 110a performs a special symbol variation process for determining whether or not the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the special symbol set in S310 has elapsed (special symbol time counter = 0). If the fluctuation time has not elapsed, the special symbol variation processing this time is terminated while maintaining the special symbol special electric processing data = 1.

When the fluctuation time has elapsed, the special symbol determined in S310 above is displayed in advance on the first special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61 by stopping and displaying the jackpot special symbol or the lost special symbol. The stop time (0.5 seconds) of the special symbol is set in the special symbol time counter. As a result, the player is notified of the determination result of the jackpot determination.

Then, the special symbol special electric processing data = 1 is set to the special symbol special electric processing data = 2, preparations are made to move to the subroutine of the special symbol stop processing, and the special symbol change processing this time is completed.

In S330, the main CPU 110a performs a special symbol stop process for determining whether or not the stop time (0.5 seconds) of the special symbol has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the stop time of the special symbol set in S320 has elapsed (special symbol time counter = 0). If the stop time has not elapsed, the special symbol stop processing this time is terminated while maintaining the special figure special electric processing data = 2.

When the stop time has elapsed, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction counter to update when 0 <time reduction count, and when the time reduction count = 0, the time reduction game flag is cleared, and when 0 <high probability number, it is high. It is updated by subtracting 1 from the probability count counter, and when the high probability count = 0, the high probability game flag is cleared.

Then, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the stop-displayed special symbol is a jackpot special symbol. If it is a jackpot special symbol, clear the time-saving game flag, high-probability game flag, time-saving number counter, and high-probability number counter, and set the special figure special electric processing data = 2 to the special figure special electric processing data = 3. , Prepare to move to the jackpot game processing subroutine, and finish this special symbol stop processing.

On the other hand, in the case of a lost special symbol, the special symbol special electric processing data = 2 is set to the special symbol special electric processing data = 0, and preparations are made to move to the subroutine of the special symbol storage determination processing, and this special symbol stop processing is performed. To finish.

In S340, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot game process for executing a first jackpot game, a second jackpot game, or a third jackpot game based on the type of jackpot special symbol (stop symbol data) set in S310. ..

Specifically, the opening time of the opening / closing member 51 according to the type of the jackpot game is set in the special game timer counter, and the drive data of the big winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b is output to open the opening / closing member 51. At this time, 1 is added to the round game count (R) storage area.

When a specified number of game balls win (win) during this opening, or when the opening time of the large winning opening 50 elapses (round winning counter (C) = 10 or special game timer counter = 0), The output of the drive data of the large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b is stopped to close the opening / closing member 51. As a result, one round game is completed. Also, the counter value of the round winning counter (C) is cleared.

When the round game of a predetermined number of times (4 times or 16 times in the present embodiment) is completed, the data stored in the round game number (R) storage area is cleared, and the special figure special electric processing data = 3 is specified. Figure Tokuden processing data = 4 is set, preparations are made to move to the subroutine of the jackpot game end processing, and the current jackpot game processing is terminated.

In S350, the main CPU 110a determines a probabilistic gaming state of either a high-probability gaming state or a low-probability gaming state, and performs a jackpot end process of determining either a time-saving gaming state or a non-time-saving gaming state. ..

Specifically, based on the type of jackpot special symbol set in S310 (stop symbol data), a high-probability game flag is set, a high-probability number of times is set, a time-saving game flag is set, and a time-saving number of times is set. The special figure special electric processing data = 4 is set to the special figure special electric processing data = 0, preparations are made to move to the subroutine of the special symbol storage determination processing, and the current jackpot game end processing is completed.

(Explanation of commands related to the production control board)
The types of commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9. 8 and 9 are diagrams showing the types of commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130.

The "first special symbol storage designation command" indicates the number of reserved storages stored in the first special symbol reserved number (U1) storage area, "MODE" is set to "E0H", and the number of reserved storages is set. The information of "DATA" is set according to.

This first special symbol storage designation command is a first special corresponding to the reserved storage number after the increase / decrease in the above S230 or S310 when the value stored in the first special symbol holding number (U1) storage area increases or decreases. The symbol storage designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of S800.

The "second special symbol storage designation command" indicates the number of reserved storages stored in the second special symbol holding number (U2) storage area, "MODE" is set to "E0H", and the number of reserved storages is set. The information of "DATA" is set according to.

This second special symbol storage designation command is a second special corresponding to the reserved storage number after the increase / decrease in the above S240 or S310 when the value stored in the second special symbol holding number (U2) storage area increases or decreases. The symbol storage designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of S800.

In the present embodiment, the "first special symbol storage designation command" and the "second special symbol storage designation command" may be collectively referred to as a "special symbol storage designation command".

The "effect symbol designation command" indicates the type (type) of the special symbol that is stopped and displayed. If it is the first special symbol, "MODE" is set to "E1H", and if it is the second special symbol, "MODE". Is set in "E2H", and the information of "DATA" is set according to the type of the special symbol. Since the type of the special symbol determines the type of the jackpot and the game state after the end of the jackpot game, the effect symbol designation command indicates the type of the jackpot and the game state after the end of the jackpot game. It can be said that.

In this effect symbol designation command, when various special symbols are determined and the variable display of the special symbol is started, the effect symbol designation command corresponding to the special symbol in the above S310 is stored in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. It is set and transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of S800.

The "first special symbol variation pattern designation command" indicates the variation time (variation mode) of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, "MODE" is set to "E3H", and various variations are made. "DATA" information is set according to the pattern.

This first special symbol variation pattern designation command is a first special symbol variation pattern corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern in S310 when the variation display of the special symbol of the first special symbol display 60 is started. The designated command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of S800.

The "second special symbol variation pattern designation command" indicates the variation time (variation mode) of the special symbol on the second special symbol display 61, "MODE" is set to "E4H", and various variations are made. "DATA" information is set according to the pattern.

This second special symbol variation pattern designation command is a second special symbol variation pattern corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern in S310 when the variation display of the special symbol of the second special symbol display 61 is started. The designated command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of S800.

In the present embodiment, the "first special symbol variation pattern designation command" and the "second special symbol variation pattern designation command" may be collectively referred to as a "variation pattern designation command".

The "special symbol confirmation command" indicates that the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and "MODE" is set to "E5H" and "DATA" is set to "00H".

In this special symbol confirmation command, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61, the special symbol confirmation command is sent to the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in S320. It is set and transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of S800.

The "normal symbol confirmation command" indicates that the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, "MODE" is set to "E5H", and "DATA" is set to "01".

In this normal symbol confirmation command, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display 62, the normal symbol confirmation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in the above S400, and is produced in the output control process of S800. It will be transmitted to the control board 130.

The "starting opening winning designation command" is information for notifying the effect control board 130 of the result of the jackpot determination (lottery) in advance, and if it is based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 45, " If "MODE" is set to "E6H" and it is based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 47, "MODE" is set to "E7H" and the information of "DATA" is set according to various winnings. Set.

In this start opening winning designation command, when a game ball wins in the first starting opening 45 or the second starting opening 47, the starting opening winning designation command corresponding to the starting winning information in the above S230 or S240 is for directing the main RAM 110c. It is set in the transmission data storage area and transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of S800.

The "big hit opening designation command" indicates that various big hit games (special game states) are started. "MODE" is set to "E8H", and "DATA" is set according to the type of big hit game. Information is set.

In this jackpot opening designation command, when various jackpot games are started, the jackpot opening designation command for the type of jackpot game is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in S330, and the output control process of S800 is performed. Will be transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "round designation command" indicates the number of rounds of the jackpot game, "MODE" is set by "E9H", and the information of "DATA" is set according to the number of rounds of the jackpot game.

In this round designation command, when the round game of the jackpot game is started, the round designation command corresponding to the number of rounds is set in the transmission data storage area for effect of the main RAM 110c in S340, and is produced in the output control process of S800. It will be transmitted to the control board 130.

The "big hit ending designation command" indicates that various jackpot games have ended, "MODE" is set to "EAH", and "DATA" information is set according to the type of jackpot game. There is.

In this jackpot ending designation command, when various jackpot games are completed, the jackpot ending designation command corresponding to the type of jackpot game is set in the transmission data storage area for production in S340, and in the output control process of S800. It will be transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "normal symbol storage designation command" indicates the number of reserved storages stored in the normal symbol holding number (G1) storage area. "MODE" is set to "ECH", and "MODE" is set to "ECH" to match the number of reserved storages. "DATA" information is set.

This normal symbol storage designation command is mainly a normal symbol designation command corresponding to the reserved storage number after the increase / decrease in the above S250 or the above S400 when the value stored in the normal symbol hold number (G1) storage area increases or decreases. It is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the RAM 110c and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of S800.

The "normal symbol designation command" indicates the type of the normal symbol that is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display 62, "MODE" is set to "EDH", and "DATA" is set according to the type of the ordinary symbol. Information is set.

In this normal symbol designation command, when various normal symbols are determined and the variation display of the normal symbol is started, the normal symbol designation command corresponding to the normal symbol is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in S400. It will be transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of S800.

The "normal symbol fluctuation designation command" indicates the fluctuation time of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 62, "MODE" is set to "EEH", and "DATA" is set according to the fluctuation time of various ordinary symbols. Information is set.

In this normal symbol fluctuation designation command, when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is started, the normal symbol fluctuation designation command corresponding to the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set in the transmission data storage area for production of the main RAM 110c in the above S400. It will be transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of S800.

The "hit opening designation command" indicates that various auxiliary games are started, "MODE" is set in "EFH", and "DATA" information is set according to the type of auxiliary game. ..

In this hit opening designation command, when the auxiliary game is started, the hit opening designation command corresponding to the type of the auxiliary game is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in the above S400, and the output control of the S800 is performed. In the process, it will be transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "hit ending designation command" indicates that various auxiliary games have been completed, "MODE" is set in "EFH", and "DATA" information is set according to the type of auxiliary game. ..

When various auxiliary games are completed, the winning ending specification command corresponding to the type of the auxiliary game is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and the output of the S800 is output. It will be transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the control process.

The "game state designation command" indicates whether or not the game is in a time-saving game state and whether or not the game is in a high-probability game state. "DATA" information is set.

This game state designation command is a game state corresponding to the game state in the above S310, the above S330, and the above S350 at the start of the change of the special symbol, the end of the change of the special symbol (at the start of the big hit game), and the end of the big hit game. The designated command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of S800.

The "power-on designation command" and the "power recovery designation command" indicate whether or not the power-on to the gaming machine 1 involves the initialization of the main RAM 110c, and "MODE" is "F1H". If it is set and the main RAM 110c is initialized, "DATA" is set to "00H", and if the main RAM 110c is not initialized, "DATA" is set to "01H to 03H".

When the power is turned on to the gaming machine 1, the power-on designation command and the power-recovery designation command include the power-on designation command or the power-recovery designation command corresponding to the presence / absence of initialization of the main RAM 110c and the gaming state in S10. It is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "customer waiting state specification command" indicates that the customer waiting state in which the change display of the special symbol is not performed is set, "MODE" is set to "F1H", and "DATA" is set to "04H". It is set.

This customer wait designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in the above S310 when the customer wait state in which the change display of the special symbol is not performed, and the effect control is performed in the output control process of the S800. It will be transmitted to the board 130.

The "error designation command" indicates an error that has occurred in the gaming machine 1, "MODE" is set to "F2H", and "DATA" information is set according to the type of error.

This error designation command is used when the occurrence of a magnetic abnormality or a radio wave abnormality is determined in the magnetic / radio wave abnormality determination process of S600, or when the occurrence of an abnormal prize is determined in the prize confirmation detection switch input process of S260. When the occurrence of an illegal prize is determined in the large prize opening detection switch input process of S220 or the second start port detection switch input process of S240, the error designation command corresponding to the error type stores the transmission data for production of the main RAM 110c. It is set in the area and transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of S800.

Further, when the game board mounting frame 3 or the glass frame 4 is opened, the lower tray 12 is full, or the payout abnormality is detected in the payout control board 120, an error designation command corresponding to the error type is transmitted for the effect of the payout RAM 121c. It is set in the data storage area and transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of the payout control board 120.

The "error cancellation designation command" indicates that the error generated in the gaming machine 1 has been resolved, "MODE" is set to "F2H", and the information of "DATA" is set according to the type of the resolved error. It is set.

This error cancellation designation command corresponds to the type of error resolved when the game board mounting frame 3 and the glass frame 4 are closed, the lower tray 12 is filled, and the payout abnormality is resolved in the payout control board 120. The error release designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the payout RAM 121c of the payout control board 120, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of the payout control board 120.

(Main processing of production control unit 130m)
Next, the main process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the effect control unit 130m. Ei (i = 10, 20 ...) Indicates a step.

When the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the sub CPU 130a, and the sub CPU 130a performs the following main processing.

The sub CPU 130a sets interrupt prohibition prohibiting timer interruption in E10, and performs initialization processing in E20. Specifically, when the power is turned on, the main processing program is read from the sub ROM 130b, the flags and the like stored in the sub RAM 130c are initialized, and processing such as initial setting is performed.

The sub CPU 130a sets the interrupt permission that permits the timer interrupt in the E30, and performs the sub random number update process in the E40. Specifically, a process of updating various random value values stored in the sub RAM 130c is performed. After that, the E40 process is repeated until the predetermined interrupt process is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing of effect control unit 130m)
The timer interrupt processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed at a predetermined cycle (4 milliseconds) in the effect control unit 130 m.

The sub CPU 130a saves the information stored in the register of the sub CPU 130a in the stack area in the E100, and performs the timer update process in the E120. In this timer update process, the sub CPU 130a performs a process of updating various timers.

The sub CPU 130a performs an input control process in the E130. Specifically, it is determined whether or not there is an input to various switches such as the effect button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a, and if there is an input, a process of setting predetermined data is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs command analysis processing in the E150. Specifically, a process of determining whether or not various commands have been transmitted from the main control board 110 and storing the received commands in the receive buffer of the sub RAM 130c when various commands have been transmitted is performed. conduct.

The sub CPU 130a performs a power-on process in the E200. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the power-on designation command is received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and if it is received, a process for performing a power-on notification is performed. More specifically, a power-on notification command is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 140 to display the power-on screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal display). The power-on sound is output from the audio output device 9.

The sub CPU 130a performs a power failure recovery process in the E250. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the power recovery designation command is received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and if it is received, a process for performing a power failure recovery notification is performed. More specifically, a power restoration notification command is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 140 to display the power restoration screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal display). A power recovery sound is output from the audio output device 9.

The sub CPU 130a performs the customer waiting effect processing in the E300. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the customer waiting state specification command is received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and if it is received, the customer waiting effect is performed after a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, 20 seconds). Perform the processing to do. More specifically, a customer waiting effect command is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 140 to display a customer waiting demo screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal display). , A customer waiting demo sound is output from the voice output device 9.

The sub CPU 130a performs the game state update process in the E350. Specifically, the process of referring to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c to determine whether or not the game state specification command is being received, and updating the game state information stored in the sub RAM 130c when the command is being received is performed. conduct.

The sub CPU 130a performs the hold information update process in the E400. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a special symbol storage designation command or a normal symbol storage designation command is received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and if it is received, it is stored in the sub RAM 130c. 1 Performs a process of updating the number of special symbol reservations, the number of second special symbol reservations, the number of ordinary symbol reservations, and the like.

The sub CPU 130a performs the icon change effect processing in the E500. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a start opening winning designation command or a variation pattern designation command is received with reference to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and if it is received, processing related to the icon change effect is performed.

The icon change effect is a kind of look-ahead notice effect that changes the hold icon and the display mode of the icon, and a plurality of types of change timings and change modes (normal change, symbol action change, and character action change) are set. ..

In the present embodiment, the icon change effect for the hold icon may be referred to as "hold icon change effect" and the icon change effect for the icon may be referred to as "the icon change effect".

The sub CPU 130a performs the special figure special electric effect effect processing in the E600. Specifically, the effect symbol designation command, the special symbol variation pattern designation command, the special symbol confirmation command, the jackpot opening designation command, the round designation command, the jackpot ending designation command, etc. are received with reference to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c. It is determined whether or not the command is being performed, and if it is received, a process for executing an effect corresponding to the received command is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs the Fuzu-fuden effect processing in the E800. Specifically, whether or not the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c is used to receive the normal map specification command, the normal symbol variation specification command, the normal symbol confirmation command, the hit opening specification command, the hit ending specification command, and the like. Judgment is performed, and when the command is received, the process for executing the effect corresponding to the received command is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs error notification processing in the E850. Specifically, it is determined whether or not an error specification command or an error cancellation specification command is received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and if it is received, an error notification effect corresponding to the received error specification command is produced. Is performed, and the process for ending the error notification effect corresponding to the received error cancellation specification command is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs output control processing in the E900. Specifically, it outputs a signal such as predetermined data, and performs a process of transmitting various commands stored in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c to the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150.

The sub CPU 130a returns the information saved by the E100 to the register of the sub CPU 130a in the E950, and ends the timer interrupt processing this time.

(Icon change effect processing of the effect control unit 130 m)
The icon change effect determination process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing an icon change effect determination process in the effect control unit 130 m.

The sub CPU 130a performs an icon change effect determination process in E510 to determine whether or not to execute the icon change effect.

The sub CPU 130a performs an icon display mode update process for updating (changing) the display mode of the already displayed icon (hold icon and the icon) in the E520, and ends the current icon change effect processing.

(Icon change effect determination process of effect control unit 130 m)
The icon change effect determination process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an icon change effect determination process in the effect control unit 130 m.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the start opening winning designation command has been received in E510-1. When the start opening prize designation command is received, the process is transferred to E510-2, and when the start opening prize designation command is not received, the icon change effect determination process this time is terminated.

The sub CPU 130a refers to the received start opening winning designation command in E510-2, and grasps whether or not it is a big hit, the type of the big hit game, and the effect content (scheduled fluctuation pattern).

In E510-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the present is the feasible period of the icon change effect. If it is the feasible period of the icon change effect, the process is transferred to E510-4, and if it is not the feasible period of the icon change effect, the current icon change effect determination process is terminated.

The executable period of the icon change effect is when the jackpot game is not being executed, the icon change effect is not being executed, or the icon change effect is not scheduled to be executed. In addition, only one condition or two conditions of any one of the above three conditions may be provided. Further, the conditions may be different from the above three conditions.

In E510-4, the sub CPU 130a has all the pre-determination results of the advance hold (holding memory corresponding to the start opening winning designation command received earlier) equal to or less than the normal reach, that is, all the advance determination results of the advance hold are normally changed or shortened. Determine if it is variable or normal reach. If all are below normal reach, the process is transferred to E510-5, and if all are not below normal reach, the process is transferred to E510-8.

The sub CPU 130a acquires an icon display mode determination random value for determining the final display mode of the icon displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) in E510-5, and the icon in E510-6. Icon for determining the final display mode of the item Select the final display mode determination table (see FIG. 14).

The sub CPU 130a determines the icon final display mode in E510-7. Specifically, the sub CPU 130a refers to the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 14, and is one of a plurality of icon final display modes based on the start opening winning designation command and the icon display mode determination random value. Determines the final display mode of the two icons.

In E510-8, the sub CPU 130a determines a normal icon (CD icon) which is a normal display mode as the icon final display mode.

The sub CPU 130a determines in E510-9 whether or not the determined icon final display mode is the display mode (special icon) for executing the icon change effect. If the display mode is to execute the icon change effect, the process is transferred to E510-10, and if the display mode is not to execute the icon change effect, the process is transferred to E510-13.

In E510-10, the sub CPU 130a selects a change scenario determination table (see FIG. 15) for determining a change scenario of the icon change effect. This change scenario shows the transition of the display mode from the appearance of the hold icon to the disappearance of the hold icon.

In E510-11, the sub CPU 130a determines a change scenario and sets it in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the hold storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c. Specifically, with reference to the change scenario determination table shown in FIG. 15, one change scenario is determined from a plurality of change scenarios based on the icon final display mode and the selection rate.

The sub CPU 130a identifies a winning icon, which is an icon display mode first displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) from the determined change scenario in E510-12, and displays the icon of the winning icon. The command is set in the transmission buffer, and the icon change effect determination process this time is terminated. As a result, the icon display command is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150 in the output control process of the E900, and the hold icon of the display mode corresponding to the icon display command of the winning icon is the first image. It is displayed on the display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and a predetermined sound effect is output.

In E510-13, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-change scenario in which the icon change effect is not executed, and sets it in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the hold storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c.

In E510-14, the sub CPU 130a sets the icon display command of the normal icon in the transmission buffer, and ends the icon change effect determination process this time. As a result, the display data is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150 in the output control process of the E900, and the hold icon in the display mode corresponding to the icon display command of the normal icon is the first image display device. It will be displayed on the 70 (main liquid crystal display) or a predetermined sound effect will be output.

In the icon change effect determination process of the present embodiment, the icon change effect (hold icon change effect, the icon change effect) is executed when all the prior determination results of the advance hold are equal to or less than the normal reach. , The icon change effect may be executed when the advance determination result of the advance hold does not perform the reach effect, and the icon change effect may not be executed when the reach effect is performed. By doing so, the display mode of the hold icon does not change during the variable effect corresponding to the advance hold in which the reach effect is executed, and the reach effect is not executed during the variable effect corresponding to the advance hold. Will change the display mode of the hold icon, and the icon change effect will not hinder the reach effect, and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, even if the pre-determination result of the advance hold includes the one that performs the reach effect, the icon change effect may be executed, but the pre-determination result of the advance hold includes the one that performs the reach effect. If there is no icon change effect, the icon change effect may be more easily executed (executed at a higher rate) than when the reach effect is included.

(Icon final display mode determination table)
FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an icon final display mode determination table referred to when determining the icon final display mode.

The icon final display mode determination table is associated with the type of the start opening winning designation command, the random value for determining the icon display mode, and the selected icon final display mode, and is the selection rate (%) shown in FIG. As described above, a random value for determining the icon display mode is assigned.

In the final icon display mode, a CD icon as a normal icon and a blue character icon, a red character icon, and a rainbow character icon are set as special icons suggesting that there is a possibility of a big hit (a big hit game is executed). Has been done.

The expectation of winning a big hit related to a special icon is higher in the order of (CD icon <) blue character icon <red character icon <rainbow character icon, and the rainbow character icon is an icon that confirms that it will be a big hit. ..

Here, as a main feature of the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 14, the selection rate of the icon final display mode is different depending on the effect content. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the effect content is specific start winning information indicating that the effect content is SP reach or SPSP reach, the effect content is normal fluctuation, shortened variation, or normal reach that does not reach reach. Character icons are selected at a higher rate than in the case of normal start winning information shown.

In the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 14, the CD icon is not selected as the icon final display mode in the case of a big hit, but it may be selected.

(Change scenario determination table)
FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a change scenario determination table referred to when determining a change scenario.

The change scenario determination table is associated with the icon final display mode, the number of special symbols held corresponding to the start opening prize designation command, the selection rate (%) of each scenario, and the type of change scenario to be selected. The preliminary fluctuations in each change scenario and the update mode in the fluctuations are described as.

Here, the "preliminary variation" is a variation display (variation effect) executed based on the special figure determination information stored before the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received start opening winning designation command. That is, the "variation" is a variation display (variation effect) executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received start opening winning designation command.

In the change scenario, the display mode of the icon does not change during the execution of the prior change (the hold icon change effect is not executed), but changes during the execution of the change (the icon change effect is executed). The scenario (for example, scenario 01, etc.) and the icon display mode change during the execution of the pre-variation (hold icon change effect is executed), but do not change during the execution of the change (the icon change effect). A scenario (for example, scenario 02, etc.) that is not executed, or a scenario (for example, the hold icon change effect and the icon change effect are executed) in which the display mode of the icon changes during the execution of the pre-variation and the execution of the change. , Scenario 15 etc.) are set.

In the change scenario determination table of the present embodiment, a scenario for changing the display mode of the icon is determined regardless of whether or not the reach effect (which may be a reach other than the normal reach) is executed in the prior variation. However, the display mode of the icon is changed by the change scenario determination table with the judgment factor as to whether or not the reach effect that suggests that the jackpot game may be executed in the advance fluctuation is executed. You may decide which scenario to let. When such a change scenario determination table is used, the display mode of the icon does not change during the execution of the pre-variation in which the reach effect is executed, and the reach effect is not executed. It is advisable to set various scenarios so that the display mode changes. In addition, the icon display mode changes during the execution of the pre-variation in which the reach effect is executed and the pre-variation in which the reach effect is not executed, but the reach effect is executed more than during the execution of the pre-variation in which the reach effect is executed. Various scenarios may be set so that the display mode of the icon changes at a higher rate during the execution of the pre-variation that is not performed.

(Icon display mode update process for the effect control unit 130m)
The icon display mode update process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing an icon display mode update process in the effect control unit 130 m.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the variation pattern designation command has been received in E520-1. When the variation pattern specification command is received, the process is transferred to E520-2, and when the variation pattern specification command is not received, the icon display mode update process this time is terminated.

In E520-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the icon change scenario stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c, and in E520-3, whether or not there is a hold icon for changing (updating) the display mode. judge. If there is a hold icon that changes the display mode, the process is transferred to E520-4, and if there is no hold icon that changes the display mode, the process is transferred to E520-7.

In E520-4, the sub CPU 130a selects a change pattern determination table (see FIG. 17) for the hold icon for determining the change pattern (change mode) of the display mode of the hold icon to be changed.

The sub CPU 130a determines the hold icon change pattern in E520-5. Specifically, with reference to the change pattern determination table for the hold icon shown in FIG. 17, among a plurality of hold icon change patterns based on the mode of the hold icon change in the current variation effect and the selection rate (%). Determines one hold icon change pattern from.

In E520-6, the sub CPU 130a sets a change effect command corresponding to the determined hold icon change pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the display data is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150 in the output control process of the E900, and the first change timing according to the hold icon change pattern and the change stage in the change timing. The display mode of the hold icon displayed on the image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) may change, or a predetermined sound effect may be output.

The sub CPU 130a determines in E520-7 whether or not there is the icon that changes (updates) the display mode. If there is the icon for changing the display mode, the process is transferred to E520-8, and if there is no icon for changing the display mode, the current icon display mode update process is terminated.

In E520-8, the sub CPU 130a is the change pattern determination table for the icon from a plurality of change pattern determination tables for determining the change pattern (change mode) of the display mode of the icon to be changed. Select the change pattern determination table (see FIGS. 18 and 19) for the icon according to the change stage in which the icon changes.

The sub CPU 130a determines the icon change pattern in E520-9. Specifically, referring to the change pattern determination table for the icon shown in FIG. 18 or FIG. 19, a plurality of the icon changes are based on the mode of the icon change in the current variation effect and the selection rate (%). One icon change pattern is determined from the patterns.

In E520-10, the sub CPU 130a sets a change effect command corresponding to the determined icon change pattern in the transmission buffer, and ends the current icon display mode update process. As a result, the display data is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150 in the output control process of the E900, and the first change timing according to the icon change pattern and the change stage in the change timing. The display mode of the icon displayed on the image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) may change, or a predetermined sound effect may be output.

(Change pattern determination table for hold icon)
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a change pattern determination table for a hold icon that is referred to when determining a change pattern for a hold icon.

The change pattern determination table for the hold icon is associated with the mode of the hold icon change in this variation effect, the selection rate (%) of each hold icon change pattern, and the type of the hold icon change pattern to be selected. For reference, the timing of occurrence of the change effect of the hold icon and the change stage in each hold icon change pattern are described.

The hold icon change pattern is a normal change pattern 01 in which the display mode of the hold icon changes with the output of a sound effect when the hold icon is shifted and displayed (at the start of fluctuation) according to the disappearance of the icon. Or, the normal change pattern 02 in which the display mode of the hold icon changes during the fluctuation with the output of the sound effect, and the action effect that acts on the icon from the character as the character appears and the icon is displayed. The character action change pattern 01 whose mode changes and the change notification symbol (special symbol) indicating that the display mode of the icon changes as a result of the variation effect are temporarily stopped and act on the hold icon starting from the change notification symbol. A symbol action change pattern 01 is set in which the action effect is performed and the display mode of the hold icon is changed.

The timing of the change effect of the hold icon is classified in relation to the progress state of the change effect, and the effect pattern is when the change effect is started (at the time of the change start) and when the change effect is being executed (during change). There is a time when the 70a is temporarily stopped ((temporarily) stopped).

At the change stage of the hold icon, 1UP (for example, change from CD icon to blue character icon, change from blue character icon to red character icon) that changes the jackpot winning expectation to the display mode one step higher, and jackpot 2UP (for example, change from a CD icon to a red character icon) is set to change the winning expectation to a display mode two levels higher.

The timing of the change effect of the hold icon is the above three timings, but the timing is not limited to these timings, and other timings may be provided. For example, it may be provided that the variable effect is being executed (during fluctuation) until the reach is established, the normal reach is being executed, the SP (SPSP) reach is being executed, and the like.

(Change pattern determination table for the icon)
18 and 19 are diagrams showing a change pattern determination table for the icon referred to when determining the change pattern of the icon, and FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a change pattern of the icon by one step. It is a table to be referred to, and FIG. 19 is a table to be referred to when the display mode of the icon is changed in two steps.

The change pattern determination table for the icon is associated with the mode of the icon change in the current variation effect, the selection rate (%) of each icon change pattern, and the type of the icon change pattern to be selected. For reference, the timing of occurrence of the change effect of the icon and the stage of change in each icon change pattern are described.

The icon change pattern includes a normal change pattern 01 in which the display mode of the hold icon changes at the start of the change with the output of the sound effect, and a normal change in the display mode of the hold icon during the change with the output of the sound effect. A change pattern 02 and a character action change pattern 01 that changes the display mode of the icon by performing an action effect that acts on the icon from the character as the character appears are set.

The timing of occurrence of the change effect of the icon is classified in relation to the progress state of the change effect, and the effect symbol is when the change effect is started (at the time of the change start) and when the change effect is being executed (during change). There is a time when the 70a is temporarily stopped ((temporarily) stopped).

At the change stage of the icon, 1UP (for example, change from CD icon to blue character icon, change from blue character icon to red character icon) that changes the jackpot winning expectation to the display mode one step higher, and jackpot 2UP (for example, change from CD icon to red character icon, change from blue character icon to rainbow character icon) is set to change the winning expectation to a display mode two levels higher.

In the change pattern determination table for the icon of the present embodiment, the symbol action change pattern 01 is not selected, but it may be possible to select it. For example, in the variation effect in which the pseudo-continuous effect is performed, the change notification symbol may be temporarily stopped when the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped before the pseudo variation is performed.

Pseudo-continuous production means that the jackpot judgment based on winning (ball winning) to one start port (first start port 45, second start port 47) is executed as if the change display of the effect symbol is performed multiple times. In order to make it look as if it was done, all the productions are made within the special figure fluctuation time determined for winning (ball winning) to one starting port (first starting port 45, second starting port 47). It is a variation display of a special mode in which the re-variation display that starts the variation again after the symbol 70a is temporarily stopped is executed once or a plurality of times.

The timing of occurrence of the change effect of the icon is limited to the above two timings, but the timing is not limited to these timings, and other timings may be provided. For example, it may be provided that the variable effect is being executed (during fluctuation) until the reach is established, the normal reach is being executed, the SP (SPSP) reach is being executed, and the like.

(Relationship between the display mode of the hold icon and the timing of the change effect occurrence)
FIG. 20A is a diagram showing the relationship between the holding icon display mode and the occurrence frequency of the change effect occurrence timing.

When the display mode of the hold icon changes to the blue character icon, the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command has a higher frequency of occurrence of the change effect than the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern specification command. ing.

In addition, when the display mode of the hold icon changes to the blue character icon, the frequency of occurrence of the change effect is higher in the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the fluctuation pattern predetermined command than in the frame update timing in response to the reception of the predetermined command. It's getting low.

That is, the hold icon is executed when the icon change effect is executed at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command than when the icon change effect is executed at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern specification command. It can be said that the display mode of is easily changed to a blue character icon.

On the other hand, when the display mode of the hold icon changes to the red character icon, the frequency of occurrence of the change effect is higher in the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the fluctuation pattern specification command than in the frame update timing in response to the reception of the predetermined command. It's getting higher.

In addition, when the display mode of the hold icon changes to the red character icon, the frequency of occurrence of the change effect is higher in the frame update timing according to the reception of the predetermined command than in the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern specification command. It's getting low.

In other words, the hold icon is more when the icon change effect is executed at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern specification command than when the icon change effect is executed at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command. It can be said that the display mode of is easily changed to a red character icon. The predetermined command is a start opening winning designation command or a variation pattern designation command.

Specifically, the change effect that occurs at the frame update timing in response to the reception of a predetermined command is that the game ball wins a prize at the start port (first start port 45, second start port 47) and a hold icon is displayed. It is a change effect (change effect at the time of winning) and a normal change pattern 01 in which the hold icon is displayed as a special icon at the timing when the hold icon is set. Further, the change effect generated at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command is a normal change pattern 02, a character action change pattern 01, and a symbol action change pattern 01.

Since the relationship between the hold icon display mode and the change effect occurrence frequency is as described above, the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern specification command is the predetermined command. Since the frequency of change effects that change to the red character icon, which has a higher expectation of winning a big hit than the frame update timing according to the reception of, is high, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the change effect occurrence timing and improve the interest of the game. It is possible to make it.

In addition, the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command has a higher frequency of the change effect that changes to the blue character icon than the predetermined frame update timing after the change pattern specification command is received, so that the change effect is early. In addition, although it is difficult to change to a red character icon with a high expectation of winning a big hit, it is easy to change to a blue character icon, so it is possible to draw the player's attention to the subsequent fluctuation production and improve the interest of the game. It will be possible.

(Relationship between change effect type and change effect occurrence timing 1)
FIG. 20B is a diagram showing the relationship 1 of the change effect occurrence frequency between the change effect type and the change effect occurrence timing.

When the change effect occurs at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of a predetermined command, the change effect occurs more frequently in the hold icon change effect than in the icon change effect.

Further, when the change effect occurs at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of a predetermined command, the change effect occurs less frequently in the icon change effect than in the hold icon change effect.

Since the relationship between the change effect type and the change effect occurrence frequency is as described above, the hold icon is likely to change at an early stage of the change effect. It is possible to pull the expectation of the jackpot game of the person for a long period of time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It should be noted that this predetermined command is a start opening winning designation command or a variation pattern designation command.

(Relationship between change effect type and change effect occurrence timing 2)
FIG. 20C is a diagram showing the relationship 2 between the change effect type and the change effect occurrence timing and the change effect occurrence frequency 2.

When the change effect occurs at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command, the change effect occurs more frequently in the icon change effect than in the hold icon change effect.

Further, when the change effect occurs at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command, the change effect occurs less frequently in the hold icon change effect than in the icon change effect.

Since the relationship between the change effect type and the change effect occurrence frequency is as described above, the icon is likely to change at a later time of the change effect. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by pulling the expectation of the jackpot game of the person until the late period of the variable production.

(Relationship between icon display mode and notification sound when icon is generated (changed))
FIG. 20D is a diagram showing the relationship between the icon display mode and the notification sound when the icon is generated (changed).

When the CD icon is generated as the hold icon, the first generation notification sound is output as the notification sound when the icon is generated, and when the hold icon and the blue character icon are generated (changed to) as the icon, the icon is generated. When the second occurrence notification sound (change notification sound) is output as the notification sound at the time of (change) and the hold icon and the red character icon are generated (changed to) as the icon, the icon is generated (change). The third generation notification sound (change notification sound) is output as the notification sound, and when the icon changes to the rainbow character icon, the fourth generation notification sound (change notification sound) is output as the notification sound when the icon changes. Is set to.

In the present embodiment, different notification sounds are set for each of the plurality of icon display modes (4 types), but the generated notification sound when the CD icon is generated, the blue character icon, and the red character icon. And the change notification sound when the icon changes to the rainbow character icon may be used. The notification sound is not output when the CD icon is generated, and the notification sound is output only when the icon changes to any mode. You may do so. Further, for the rainbow icon that is confirmed to be a big hit, a dedicated change notification sound may be provided to make three types.

(Main processing of the overall control unit 141)
The main process of the integrated control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. 21. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the integrated control unit 141. In addition, Ti (i = 1, 2, ...) Indicates a step.

When the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the control CPU 142, and the control CPU 142 performs the following main processing.

First, the integrated CPU 142 sets interrupt prohibition that prohibits timer interruption in T1, and performs initialization processing in T2. Specifically, the main processing program is read from the control ROM 143, the flags and the like stored in the control RAM 144 are initialized, and processing such as initial setting is performed.

In T3, the centralized CPU 142 sets an interrupted permission that permits timer interrupts, and in T4, refers to the receive buffer of the integrated RAM 144 and determines whether or not an effect instruction command is received from the effect control unit 130 m. If it is not received, the process is transferred to T7, and if it is received, the animation pattern is set by determining the animation pattern from the type of animation group corresponding to the received production specification command in T5. Perform processing.

Examples of the effect instruction command include a customer waiting effect command, an icon display command, a change effect command, a variable effect pattern command, a symbol stop pattern command, an opening effect pattern command, a round effect pattern command, and an ending effect pattern command.

The animation group is the type of object that constitutes the production image, the scene (timing) and wait frame (display time) at which the production image is displayed, the target data (sprite image identification number, transfer source address, etc.), By bundling one or more animation patterns that are information that specifies (designates) parameters (display position of sprite image, transfer destination address, etc.), drawing method, information that specifies the image display device that displays the effect image, etc. It is a formed group.

The types of animation groups include, for example, an effect symbol group for displaying the animation of the effect symbol 70a, an icon group for displaying the hold icon and the animation of the icon, and a variable effect animation such as a background and a character. Examples include a variable effect group, a notice effect group for displaying an animation such as a notice, and a special game effect group for displaying an animation of a special game effect.

In T6, the general CPU 142 performs sound setting processing for determining and setting a sound pattern from a sound group of the type corresponding to the received effect instruction command, and in T7, updates the effect image to be displayed on the image display device (new). If there is a frame switching flag, the process is transferred to T4, and if there is a frame switching flag, it is determined whether or not there is a frame switching flag indicating that it is the frame update timing. Clears the frame switching flag at T8.

In T9, the control CPU 142 generates a display list composed of drawing control command groups, and performs display list generation / output processing to output the generated display list to the image control unit 145 (VDP).

Here, the display list is image shaping information for molding the effect image to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal display), and is one unit or a plurality of units. It is generated for each frame (frame update timing), and in the present embodiment, the display list is generated for each frame.

Specifically, since the animation scene information (address) is updated for each animation pattern set in the animation control process described later, a drawing control command is set for each set animation pattern according to the contents of the animation scene information. A display list for one frame corresponding to the current number of frames is generated. The drawing control commands are sequentially set from the animation pattern of the animation group having the lowest priority to the animation pattern of the animation group having the highest priority according to the priority (drawing order) set to the animation group to which each animation pattern belongs. However, the reverse is also possible.

In T10, the control CPU 142 performs drawing command processing for instructing the image control unit 145 (VDP) to draw an effect image based on the output list. By performing this drawing command processing, the image control unit 145 (VDP) draws the effect image based on the display list in the drawing frame buffer, and the effect image drawn in the display frame buffer is the first image display device. A process of displaying on the 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) is performed.

In T11, the general CPU 142 generates a sound list composed of sound control command groups, and generates and outputs a sound list that outputs the generated sound list to the voice control unit 148.

Here, the sound list is audio output information for designating sounds (BGM, sound effects, etc.) such as audio data and music data to be output from the audio output device 9, and is used when a new sound is output. It is generated based on the drawing frame.

In T12, the control CPU 142 performs sound output command processing for instructing the output of the sound based on the sound list output to the voice control unit 148. By performing this sound output command processing, the voice control unit 148 outputs the sound based on the sound list from the voice output device 9.

Therefore, the various sounds are started to be output from the audio output device 9 so as to be synchronized (tuned) with the frame update timing by the image control unit 145 (VDP), and are synchronized (tuned) with the frame update timing. The output from the audio output device 9 is terminated.

The audio output device 9 starts outputting various sounds so as to synchronize (synchronize) with the frame update timing, but the audio output device 9 outputs various sounds so as not to synchronize (synchronize) with the frame update timing. May be stopped and vice versa.

In T13, the general CPU 142 performs animation control processing for updating animation scene information (address) for each set animation pattern in preparation for creating a display list for the next frame, and then moves the processing to T4. After that, the processes from T4 to T13 are repeated so as to loop.

(Command reception interrupt processing of the overall control unit 141)
The command reception interrupt process of the integrated control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. 22. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a command reception interrupt process of the overall control unit 141, and the command reception interrupt process is executed by receiving an effect instruction command transmitted from the effect control unit 130 m.

In T20, the control CPU 142 performs a command reception process for receiving an effect instruction command transmitted from the effect control unit 130 m. Specifically, a process of storing the effect instruction command transmitted from the effect control unit 130 m in the receive buffer of the control RAM 144 is performed, and the current command reception interrupt process is terminated.

(V blank interrupt processing of the overall control unit 141)
The V blank interrupt process of the overall control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. 23. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the V blank interrupt process of the general control unit 141, and the V blank interrupt process ends the display of the effect image for one frame from the image control unit 145 (VDP) (1/30). It is executed every time a V blank signal transmitted every second (second = about 33 ms) is received (1/30 second = about 33 ms).

The control CPU 142 performs counter update processing for updating a predetermined number of counters (scene switching counter, wait frame counter, frame counter, etc.) in T30 (for example, adding “1”), and in T31, the image control unit 145 (VDP). A frame buffer switching command process for instructing the VRAM 147 to switch between the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area is performed.

As a result, each time the V blank interrupt process is executed every 1/30 second (about 33 ms), the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area become a "drawing frame buffer" and a "display frame buffer". It will be switched alternately with.

In T32, the control CPU 142 sets a frame switching flag indicating that the drawing (display) frame has been switched, and ends the current V blank interrupt processing. Since this frame switching flag is referred to in T7, the processes T8 to T13 are executed every time the V blank interrupt process is executed (frame update timing).

(Time chart of change production at the time of winning)
24 and 25 are timing charts showing various timings when the display mode of the first hold icon is displayed (changed) by the blue character icon when the game ball is won in the first start port 45.

The timing of T1 is the timing of the 280th frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the effect symbol 70a is performed. At this timing, drawing of the image data b (background image, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image data a drawn in the second frame buffer is drawn on the image display device. The display is started, and the image display device is in a state where the normal variation effect display screen a is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the timing in the middle of the 280th frame after the variation effect is started. At this timing, a start opening winning designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control unit 130m based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the first starting opening 45.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 281st frame after the start of the variation effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, it is decided to display the display mode of the first hold icon with the blue character icon at the time of winning, but the blue character icon is not displayed on the image display device, and the second generation notification sound from the voice output device 9 Output is not started either.

Further, at the timing of T3, drawing of image data c (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the second frame buffer is started, and the image drawn in the first frame buffer is started. The display of the data b on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen b is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 282nd frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data d (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image data c drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display on the image display device is started, the normal variation effect display screen c is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second generation notification sound is started from the voice output device 9. The timing of this T4 corresponds to the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of a predetermined command.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 283rd frame after the start of the variation effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of image data e (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the second frame buffer is started, and the image data d drawn in the first frame buffer is The display on the image display device is started, the normal variation effect display screen d (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second generation notification sound of the voice output device 9 is continued. ..

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 284th frame after the start of the variation effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data f (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image data e drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display on the image display device is started, the normal variation effect display screen e (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second generation notification sound of the voice output device 9 is continued. ..

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 296th frame after the start of the variation effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data h (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image data g drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display on the image display device is started, the normal variation effect display screen g (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second generation notification sound of the voice output device 9 is continued. ..

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 297th frame after the start of the variation effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, the output of the second generation notification sound that had been output for about 0.5 seconds (15 frames) is stopped. Further, the drawing of the image data i (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the second frame buffer is started, and the image display of the image data h drawn in the first frame buffer is started. The display on the device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen i (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 298th frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data j (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image data i drawn in the second frame buffer is The display on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen i (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device.

In this way, the audio output device 9 starts outputting the second generation notification sound in accordance with (synchronously) the frame update timing in which the blue character icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display). Therefore, compared to the case where the frame update timing between the display of the blue character icon and the output of the second generation notification sound is different from the case where the frame update timing is started, it is possible to reduce the player's feeling of discomfort, and the interest of the game can be improved. It will be possible to improve.

Also, while the output of the second generation notification sound was started in accordance with the frame update timing when the blue character icon is displayed (synchronously), the blue character icon is deleted and the second generation notification sound is output. Since it is performed at a frame update timing different from the stop of, it is possible to stop the output of the second occurrence notification sound without being restricted by the timing to erase the blue character icon, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game. It becomes.

(Example of production change at the time of winning)
FIG. 26 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in which the display mode of the first hold icon is displayed (changed to) by the blue character icon when the game ball is won in the first start port 45.

As shown in FIG. 26A, a normal variation in which the effect symbol 70a is variablely displayed in a state where the first hold icon and the second hold icon are not displayed, that is, in a state where no hold memory is stored. The production is being executed.

Here, based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 45, a starting port winning designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control unit 130m, and the icon change effect determination process is executed, as a change scenario. It is assumed that "scenario 02" (the display mode of the first hold icon is displayed by a blue character icon at the time of winning) is determined.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 26B, the first holding icon (blue character) is displayed on the first display unit 70B1 of the first holding icon display area 70B in response to the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 45. Icon) H11 is displayed, and the second generation notification sound is output from the voice output device 9 for 0.5 seconds.

Then, as shown in FIG. 26 (c), stop display is performed with a combination (here, “234”) indicating that the effect symbol 70a that has been variablely displayed is a loss, and is displayed in the icon display area 70c. The icon (CD icon) TH that has been displayed is deleted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 26 (d), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the first hold icon (blue character icon) H11 of the first display unit 70B1 is shifted to the icon display area 70C. Will be done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 26 (e), while the effect symbol 70a of "2" is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in the left and right variable display areas of the effect symbol 70a that has been variablely displayed, in the central variable display area. A reach effect is executed in which the effect symbol 70a is variablely displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 26 (f), the effect symbol 70a of "3" is stopped and displayed in the central variation display area, so that the reach effect ends and the variation display ends. Here, since the variable display is completed, the icon (blue character icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

Although not shown, BGM, sound effects, and the like are output from the voice output device 9 during the fluctuation effect. The same applies to the following FIGS. 29, 32, 33, 36 and 37.

(Timing chart of normal change pattern 01)
27 and 28 are timing charts showing various timings when the normal change pattern 01 is determined as the hold icon change pattern in the icon display mode update process and the display mode of the first hold icon is changed to the blue character icon. be.

The timing of T1 is the timing of the 600th frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol stop period in which the stop display of the effect symbol 70a is performed. At this timing, drawing of the image data b (background image, various stop effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image data a drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display on the image display device is started, and the stop effect display image a is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T2 is the timing in the middle of the 600th frame after the variation effect is started. At this timing, the fluctuation pattern designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control unit 130m.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 601st frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol stop period. At this timing, it is decided to execute the normal change pattern 01 that changes the first hold icon to the blue character icon, but the blue character icon is not displayed on the image display device, and the second generation occurs from the sound output device 9. The output of the notification sound is not started either.

Further, at the timing of T3, drawing of image data c (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the second frame buffer is started, and the image drawn in the first frame buffer is started. The display of the data b on the image display device is started, and the stop effect display screen b is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T4 is the timing (the timing at which the variation effect is started), which is the first frame after the start of the next variation effect. At this timing, drawing of the image data d (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image data c drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display on the image display device is started, the normal variation effect display screen c (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second generation notification sound is started from the voice output device 9. .. The timing of this T4 corresponds to the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of a predetermined command.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the second frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of image data e (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the second frame buffer is started, and the image data d drawn in the first frame buffer is The display on the image display device is started, the normal variation effect display screen d (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second generation notification sound of the voice output device 9 is continued. ..

The timing of T6 is the timing of the third frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data f (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image data e drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display on the image display device is started, the normal variation effect display screen e is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second generation notification sound of the voice output device 9 is continued.

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 15th frame after the start of the variation effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data h (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image data g drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display on the image display device is started, the normal variation effect display screen g (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second generation notification sound of the voice output device 9 is continued. ..

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 16th frame after the start of the variation effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, the output of the second generation notification sound that had been output for about 0.5 seconds (15 frames) is stopped, and the image data i (background image, various variation effect images, various types) to the second frame buffer is stopped. Drawing of a pattern image, various icon images, etc.) is started, display of the image data h drawn in the first frame buffer on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen h (blue) is displayed on the image display device. (Character icon display) is displayed.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 17th frame from the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data j (background image, variation effect image, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image of the image data i drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display on the display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen i (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device.

In this way, the audio output device 9 starts outputting the second generation notification sound in accordance with (synchronously) the frame update timing in which the blue character icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display). Therefore, compared to the case where the frame update timing between the display of the blue character icon and the output of the second generation notification sound is different from the case where the frame update timing is started, it is possible to reduce the player's feeling of discomfort, and the interest of the game can be improved. It will be possible to improve.

Also, while the output of the second generation notification sound was started in accordance with the frame update timing when the blue character icon is displayed (synchronously), the blue character icon is deleted and the second generation notification sound is output. Since it is performed at a frame update timing different from the stop of, it is possible to stop the output of the second occurrence notification sound without being restricted by the timing to erase the blue character icon, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game. It becomes.

(Example of production of normal change pattern 01)
FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an effect example when the display mode of the first hold icon is changed to the blue character icon (normal change pattern 01) at the start of fluctuation (shift).

As shown in FIG. 29 (a), when the first hold icons (CD icons) H11 and H12 are displayed on the first display unit 70B1 and the second display unit 70B2 of the first hold icon display area 70B, the loss occurs. It is assumed that the stop display of the effect symbol indicating is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 29 (b), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the first hold icons (CD icons) H11 and H12 are attached to the first display unit 70B1 and the second display unit 70B2. The icon display area 70C and the first display unit 70B1 are shifted and displayed.

Here, when the first hold icon (CD icon) H12 displayed on the second display unit 70B2 is shifted and displayed on the first display unit 70B1, the display mode is changed to a blue character icon. Further, the CD icon is changed to the blue character icon, and the voice output device 9 outputs the second generation notification sound for 0.5 seconds.

After that, as shown in FIG. 29 (c), stop display is performed with a combination (here, “164”) indicating that the effect symbol 70a that has been variablely displayed is a loss, and is displayed in the icon display area 70C. The icon (CD icon) TH that has been displayed is deleted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 29 (d), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the first hold icon (blue character icon) H11 of the first display unit 70B1 is shifted to the icon display area 70C. Will be done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 29 (e), while the effect symbol 70a of "2" is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in the left and right variable display areas of the effect symbol 70a that has been variablely displayed, in the central variable display area. A reach effect is executed in which the effect symbol 70a is variablely displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 29 (f), the effect symbol 70a of "3" is stopped and displayed in the central variation display area, so that the reach effect ends and the variation display ends. Here, since the variable display is completed, the icon (blue character icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

(Timing chart of character action change pattern 01)
30 and 31 are timing charts showing various timings when the character action change pattern 01 is determined as the icon change pattern in the icon display mode update process and the display mode of the icon TH is changed to the red character icon. be.

The timing of T1 is the timing of the first frame after the start of the variation effect (the timing of the start of the variation effect), and is the frame update timing of the start of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the effect symbol 70a is performed. .. At this timing, drawing of the image data b (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image data a drawn in the second frame buffer is The display on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen a is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T2 is the timing of the 61st frame after the start of the variation effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, the effect control unit 130m has decided to execute the character action change pattern 01 that changes the display mode of the icon TH to the red character icon, but the image display device does not display the character or the like, and the sound is heard. The output of the third generation notification sound from the output device 9 is also not started.

Further, at the timing of T2, drawing of image data d (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, character images, etc.) in the second frame buffer is started, and is drawn in the first frame buffer. The display of the image data c that has been performed on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen c is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 62nd frame after the start of the variation effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of image data e (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, character images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display of the data d on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen d (character display) is displayed on the image display device, but the sound output device 9 does not output the third generation notification sound. Will continue.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 63rd frame after the start of the variation effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of image data f (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, character images, etc.) in the second frame buffer is started, and the image drawn in the first frame buffer is started. The display of the data e on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen e (character display) is displayed on the image display device, but the sound output device 9 does not output the third generation notification sound. Will continue.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 64th frame after the start of the variation effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of image data g (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, character images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display of the data f on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen f (character display) is displayed on the image display device, but the sound output device 9 does not output the third generation notification sound. Will continue.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 91st frame after the start of the variation effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data h (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image data g drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen g (character display) is displayed on the image display device, but the non-output of the third generation notification sound is continued from the voice output device 9. To.

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 92nd frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data i (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the second frame buffer is started, and the image data h drawn in the first frame buffer is started. The display on the image display device is started, the normal variation effect display screen h (red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the third generation notification sound is started from the voice output device 9. .. The timing of this T7 corresponds to a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 106th frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, the output of the third generation notification sound of the voice output device 9 continues, and the image data j (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is continued. Drawing is started, the display of the image data i drawn in the second frame buffer on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen i (red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device. It becomes.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 107th frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, the output of the third generation notification sound that had been output for about 0.5 seconds (15 frames) is stopped, and the image data k (background image, various variation effect images, various types) to the second frame buffer is stopped. Drawing of a pattern image, various icon images, etc.) is started, display of the image data j drawn in the first frame buffer on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen j (red) is displayed on the image display device. (Character icon display) is displayed.

The timing of T10 is the timing of the 108th frame after the start of the variation effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data l (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image data k drawn in the second frame buffer is The display on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen k (red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device.

In this way, the sound output device 9 starts outputting the third generation notification sound in accordance with (synchronously) the frame update timing in which the red character icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display). Therefore, compared to the case where the frame update timing between the display of the red character icon and the output of the third occurrence notification sound is different from the case where the frame update timing is started, it is possible to reduce the player's feeling of discomfort, and the interest of the game can be improved. It will be possible to improve.

In addition, while the output of the third generation notification sound was started according to the frame update timing when the red character icon is displayed (synchronously), the red character icon is deleted and the third generation notification sound is deleted. Since the frame update timing is different from the output stop, the output of the third generation notification sound can be stopped without being restricted by the timing to erase the red character icon, which can improve the fun of the game. It will be possible.

(Production example of character action change pattern 01)
32 and 33 are diagrams showing an example of an effect when the display mode of the icon TH is changed to a red character icon (character action change pattern 01) during the variation effect.

As shown in FIG. 32 (a), the effect symbol 70a is normally displayed in a variable manner in a state where the first hold icon and the second hold icon are not displayed, that is, in a state where no hold memory is stored. Fluctuation production is being executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 32 (c), after the character C1 is displayed (see FIG. 32 (b)), the character C1 performs a throwing kiss operation and directs the heart H toward the icon (CD icon) TH. The production of skipping is performed.

Then, when the heart H hits the icon TH, as shown in FIG. 32 (d), the display mode of the icon TH changes from the CD icon to the red character icon, and the voice output device 9 sets the third generation notification sound. Is output for 0.5 seconds.

After that, as shown in FIG. 33 (a), while the effect symbol 70a of "2" is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in the left and right variable display areas of the effect symbol 70a that has been variablely displayed, in the central variable display area. A reach effect is executed in which the effect symbol 70a is variablely displayed.

Then, when the SP reach is developed, as shown in FIG. 33 (b), the production in which the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 confront each other is started. When the SP reach is developed, the effect symbol 70a is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the screen, and the first hold icon display area 70B and the second hold icon display area 70D are erased.

After that, as shown in FIG. 33 (c), the ally character C2 wins over the enemy character C3, suggesting that it is a big hit, and the combination showing that the variable display effect symbol 70a is a big hit (here). Then, the stop display is displayed at "222").

Then, as shown in FIG. 33 (d), the effect symbol 70a returns from the reduced display to the original size and is stopped and displayed at the center of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display). Here, since the variable display is completed, the icon (red character icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

(Example of effect of pattern action change pattern 01)
34 and 35 are timing charts showing various timings when the symbol action change pattern 01 is determined as the hold icon change pattern in the icon display mode update process and the display mode of the first hold icon is changed to the red character icon. Is.

The timing of T1 is the timing of the first frame after the start of the variation effect (the timing of the start of the variation effect), and is the frame update timing of the start of the normal variation period in which the normal variation effect of the effect symbol 70a is performed. be. At this timing, drawing of the image data b (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image data a drawn in the second frame buffer is The display on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen a is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T2 is the timing of the 299th frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, it is decided to execute the character action change pattern 01 that changes the display mode of the first hold icon to the red character icon, but the image display device does not display the change pattern or the like, and the sound output device 9 The output of the third generation notification sound is also not started.

Further, at the timing of T2, drawing of image data d (background image, various stop effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, change symbol images, etc.) to the second buffer frame is started, and drawing is performed in the first frame buffer. The display of the image data c that has been performed is started on the image display device, and the normal variation effect display screen c is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 300th frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing of the symbol temporary stop period in which the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped. At this timing, drawing of image data e (background image, various stop effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, change symbol images, etc.) in the first frame buffer was started, and was drawn in the second frame buffer. The display of the image data d on the image display device is started, and the temporary stop effect display screen d (change symbol display) is displayed on the image display device. The output does not start.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 301st frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, drawing of image data f (background image, various stop effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, change symbol images, etc.) in the second frame buffer was started, and was drawn in the first frame buffer. The display of the image data e on the image display device is started, and the temporary stop effect display screen e (change symbol display) is displayed on the image display device, but the third generation notification sound of the voice output device 9 is displayed. Non-output continues.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 302nd frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, drawing of image data g (background image, various stop effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, change symbol images, etc.) in the first frame buffer was started, and was drawn in the second frame buffer. The display of the image data f on the image display device is started, and the temporary stop effect display screen f (change symbol display) is displayed on the image display device. Non-output continues.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 330th frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. The drawing of the image data h (background image, various stop effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, change symbol images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image data g drawn in the second frame buffer is The display on the image display device is started, and the temporary stop effect display screen g (change symbol display) is displayed on the image display device, but the non-output of the third generation notification sound of the voice output device 9 continues. Will be done.

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 331st frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, drawing of image data i (background image, various stop effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, change symbol images, etc.) in the second frame buffer was started and was drawn in the first frame buffer. The display of the image data h on the image display device is started, the temporary stop effect display screen h (change symbol display and red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the third generation is generated from the voice output device 9. The output of the notification sound is started. The timing of this T7 corresponds to a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 345th frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, drawing of image data j (background image, various stop effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, change symbol images, etc.) in the first frame buffer was started, and was drawn in the second frame buffer. The display of the image data i on the image display device is started, the temporary stop effect display screen i (change symbol and red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the third occurrence notification of the voice output device 9 is displayed. Sound output continues.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 346th frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, the output of the third generation notification sound that had been output for about 0.5 seconds (15 frames) is stopped, and the image data k (background image, various stop effect images, various types) to the second frame buffer is stopped. Drawing of a symbol image, various icon images, change symbol images, etc.) is started, display of the image data j drawn in the first frame buffer on the image display device is started, and a temporary stop effect display is displayed on the image display device. The screen j (change symbol and red character icon display) is displayed.

The timing of T10 is the timing of the 347th frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, drawing of the image data l (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image data k drawn in the second frame buffer is The display on the image display device is started, and the temporary stop effect display screen k (change symbol and red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device.

In this way, the sound output device 9 starts outputting the third generation notification sound in accordance with (synchronously) the frame update timing in which the red character icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display). Therefore, compared to the case where the frame update timing between the display of the red character icon and the output of the third occurrence notification sound is different from the case where the frame update timing is started, it is possible to reduce the player's feeling of discomfort, and the interest of the game can be improved. It will be possible to improve.

In addition, while the output of the third generation notification sound was started according to the frame update timing when the red character icon is displayed (synchronously), the red character icon is deleted and the third generation notification sound is deleted. Since the frame update timing is different from the output stop, the output of the third generation notification sound can be stopped without being restricted by the timing to erase the red character icon, which can improve the fun of the game. It will be possible.

(Example of effect of pattern action change pattern 01)
36 and 37 are diagrams showing an effect example when the display mode of the hold icon is changed to the red character icon (design action change pattern 01) while the effect symbol 70a is stopped (temporarily stopped).

As shown in FIG. 36 (a), in a state where the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed on the first display unit 70B1 of the first hold icon display area 70B, the effect symbol 70a is varied and displayed. The production is being executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 36 (b), the effect symbol 70a of "2" in the left fluctuation display area, "3" in the right fluctuation display area, and "change" in the center fluctuation display area is stopped and displayed (provisional). When a lightning bolt-like effect appears toward the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 of the first display unit 70B1 from the change symbol that is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in the center fluctuation display area while (stopping), and hits. , The display mode of the first hold icon H11 changes from the CD icon to the red character icon, and the third generation notification sound is output from the voice output device 9 for 0.5 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 36 (c), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the first hold icon (red character icon) H11 of the first display unit 70B1 is shifted to the icon display area 70C. Will be done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 37 (a), while the effect symbol 70a of "2" is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in the left and right variable display areas of the effect symbol 70a that has been variablely displayed, in the central variable display area. A reach effect is executed in which the effect symbol 70a is variablely displayed.

Then, when the SP reach is developed, as shown in FIG. 37 (b), the production in which the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 confront each other is started. When the SP reach is developed, the effect symbol 70a is reduced and displayed in the upper left, and the first hold icon display area 70B and the second hold icon display area 70D are erased.

After that, as shown in FIG. 37 (c), the ally character C2 wins over the enemy character C3, suggesting that it is a big hit, and the combination indicating that the variable display effect symbol 70a is a big hit ( Here, the stop display is displayed at "222").

Then, as shown in FIG. 37 (d), the effect symbol 70a returns from the reduced display to the original size and is stopped and displayed at the center of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display). Here, since the variable display is completed, the icon (red character icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 130m executes the change effect at the frame update timing according to the reception of a predetermined command (start opening winning designation command or variation pattern designation command). Since the effect control unit 130m may execute the change effect at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern specification command, it is possible to improve the fun of the game by increasing the variation of the change effect. Become.

In the present embodiment, the icon change effect determines the final display mode and the scenario when the effect control unit 130m receives the start opening winning designation command, but the present invention is not limited to such a determination method. .. For example, it may be determined whether or not to change the display mode each time the display mode of the icon (the icon, the hold icon) can be changed. Further, when the effect control unit 130m receives the start opening winning designation command, only the final display mode is determined, and how it changes is the timing at which the display mode of the icon (the icon, the hold icon) can be changed. When it becomes, it may be decided each time.

Further, in the present embodiment, there are four types of display modes of the icons (corresponding icon, hold icon): a CD icon as a normal icon, a blue character icon as a special icon, a red character icon, and a rainbow character icon. However, the number is not limited to four, and may be large or small.

For example, a special icon (blinking CD icon) may be provided, which has a lower expectation of winning a big hit than the blue character icon and may change to a special icon. When such a special icon is provided, since the jackpot winning expectation is lower than that of the blue character icon, the normal change pattern 02, the character action change pattern 01, and the symbol action change pattern 01 (predetermined after receiving the change pattern designation command). Since it will not change to a special icon due to the change effect that occurs at the frame update timing), it is possible to increase the variation of the icon display mode while preventing the player from being discouraged, and improve the interest of the game. It is possible to make it.

Further, in addition to the four types of the present embodiment, the above special icon and the green character icon may be provided. In this case, the jackpot winning expectation for the icon (corresponding icon, hold icon) is (CD icon) <blinking CD icon <blue character icon <green character icon <red character icon <rainbow character icon in this order. You just have to make it higher.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the character C1 or the changed symbol is displayed in the character action change pattern 01 or the symbol action change pattern 01, the display mode of the icon (the icon, the hold icon) is always changed. However, there may be a case where the character C1 or the change symbol is not changed even if it is displayed (so-called ghost effect). When such a ghost effect is provided, the ghost effect for the normal change pattern 02, the character action change pattern 01, and the symbol action change pattern 01 (change effect that occurs at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the change pattern specification command) is better. The execution rate is higher than the Gase effect for the change effect at the time of winning and the normal change pattern 01 (change effect that occurs at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of a predetermined command), or the symbol action change pattern 01 (after receiving the change pattern specification command). It is desirable to be able to execute only the Gase effect for the change effect) that occurs at the predetermined frame update timing.

Further, in the present embodiment, the icon change effect is not executed a plurality of times during one variation effect, but may be executed a plurality of times. In this case, the change effect at the time of winning and the normal change pattern 01 (the change effect that occurs at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of a predetermined command) have only one timing during the change effect, so that the normal change pattern 02 , The character action change pattern 01 and the symbol action change pattern 01 (change effect generated at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the change pattern designation command) may be executed a plurality of times. By doing so, the display mode of the icon (the icon, the hold icon) may change a plurality of times in one variable effect, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the execution timing of the change effect (change effect at the time of winning and the normal change pattern 01) generated at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command is set to the predetermined command (starting port winning designation command or). The frame update timing was set to be 2 frames after the number of frames received (variation pattern specification command), but it is not limited to 2 frames, and if it is not extremely late after receiving the specified command, it can be 1 frame or several frames later. good.

Further, in the present embodiment, the symbol action change pattern 01 is not provided as the icon change pattern, but it may be provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the "normal change pattern 01" is executed, the change effect is executed at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the fluctuation pattern designation command, but the change effect is not limited to this timing, for example, special. The change effect may be executed at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the symbol memory designation command or the effect symbol specification command.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the "normal change pattern 02", the "character action change pattern 01", and the "design action change pattern 01" are executed, the change effect is produced at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the change pattern designation command. However, the change effect may be executed not only at this timing but also at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving another predetermined command.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the icon (the icon, the hold icon) changes, an icon generation (change) notification sound is output as an effect of notifying that the icon (the icon, the hold icon) has changed. However, it is not limited to such an effect, and in addition to the output of the icon generation (change) notification sound, the changed icon (the icon, hold) is used by using the panel lighting device 74 and / or the frame lighting device 10. The lamp may be made to emit light in the same color as the color of the display mode of the icon). In this case, as with the output of the icon generation (change) notification sound, the frame update timing at which the changed icon (corresponding icon, hold icon) is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). At the same time (synchronously), the lamps of the panel lighting device 74 and / or the frame lighting device 10 may be started to emit light, and the timing of ending the light emission of the lamp is set to end after a lapse of a predetermined time. Alternatively, the icon (the icon, the hold icon) may be terminated at the frame update timing (synchronized) to be deleted.

Further, in the present embodiment, the icon and the hold icon are displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display), but may be displayed on the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal display). ..

Further, in the present embodiment, the execution of the icon change effect is not restricted depending on the game state, but the execution of the icon change effect may be restricted depending on the game state. For example, in the first specific game state and the second specific game state, the change effect at the time of winning and the normal change pattern 01 (change effect generated at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of a predetermined command) can be executed, but the normal change. The pattern 02, the character action change pattern 01, and the symbol action change pattern 01 (change effect generated at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the fluctuation pattern designation command) may be infeasible. By doing so, since the fluctuation time is set short in the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state, the normal change pattern 02, the character action change pattern 01, and the symbol action change executed during the fluctuation are set. By limiting the execution of pattern 01 (change effect that occurs at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command), the game can be played without impairing the playability of the first specific game state and the second specific game state. It is possible to improve the interest.

Further, in the present embodiment, the icon change effect changes the display mode (shape and color) of the hold icon and the icon itself, but the display is not limited to such a change, and the hold icon and the icon itself are displayed. The mode may not be changed (the CD icon remains), and an effect of a color indicating the jackpot winning expectation may be displayed around the hold icon or the icon, or around (near) the hold icon or the icon. A character indicating the degree of expectation of winning a big hit may be displayed, or a character image suggesting an effect to be executed may be displayed around (near) the hold icon or the icon (for example, "SP" or "pseudo-ren"). May be displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the change scenario is determined, the determination is made regardless of the winning of the jackpot, but the determination may be made with reference to the winning of the jackpot. Specifically, one change scenario may be determined from a plurality of scenarios based on the icon final display mode, the current number of holds, the winning of the jackpot, and the selection rate (%).

In this way, when deciding the change scenario by referring to the winning of the jackpot, if the jackpot is won and it changes to the red character icon, the current number of reservations is "1" or "2" rather than "1" or "2". In the case of "3" or "4", the selection rate (%) may be set so that the change scenario that changes to the red character icon at the time of winning is more likely to be selected.
In other words, if you win a big hit and change to a red character icon, the red character at the time of winning is better when the current number of holds is "1" or "2" than when it is "3" or "4". It can be said that the selection rate (%) makes it difficult to select a change scenario that changes to an icon.
Also, if you have not won the jackpot, that is, if you are lost and change to the red character icon, the change scenario that changes to the red character icon at the time of winning than if you won the jackpot and change to the red character icon. Can be set to a selection rate (%) that is difficult to select.

Further, in the present embodiment, when determining the hold icon change pattern, the decision is made regardless of the current number of holds and the winning of the jackpot, but the decision is made by referring to the current number of holdings and the winning of the jackpot. You may. Specifically, one hold icon from a plurality of hold icon change patterns based on the mode of the hold icon change in this variation effect, the current number of holds, the winning of the jackpot, and the selection rate (%). The change pattern may be determined.

In this way, when determining the hold icon change pattern by referring to the current number of holds and the winning of the jackpot, if the jackpot is won and the red character icon changes, the current number of holds is "1" or ". The selection rate (%) may be set so that "normal change pattern 01" is more easily selected as the hold icon change pattern in the case of "3" or "4" than in the case of "2".
In other words, if you win a jackpot and change to a red character icon, the hold icon change pattern is better when the current number of holds is "1" or "2" than when it is "3" or "4". It can be said that the selection rate (%) is difficult to select as “normal change pattern 01”.
In addition, if the jackpot is not won, that is, if the jackpot is lost and the icon changes to the red character icon, the "normal change pattern 01" is used as the hold icon change pattern rather than the case where the jackpot is won and the red character icon is changed. ] Can be set to a selection rate (%) that is difficult to select.

As described above, when the red character icon changes in the winning change effect and the normal change pattern 01 (change effect that occurs at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of a predetermined command), the current number of holds is "1" or Since the expectation of winning a big hit is higher in the case of "3" or "4" than in the case of "2", it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Second Embodiment)
Hereinafter, the second embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. Here, the description of the same parts as those of the first embodiment will be omitted, and the different parts will be described.

In the second embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 39A, a special symbol TZ that is variablely displayed in correspondence with the variable display of the special symbol is provided in the lower right corner of the display unit of the first image display device 70. It differs from the first embodiment in that a special symbol display area for displaying is provided.

Further, on the left end of the display unit of the first image display device 70, a first reserved number display area 70E for displaying a first reserved number indicating the current first special symbol reserved number (U1) and a current first reserved number display area 70E. 2 It is also different from the first embodiment in that a second reserved number display area 70F for displaying a second reserved number indicating the special symbol reserved number (U2) is provided.

The first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number displayed in the second reserved number display area 70F correspond to the first reserved information, and are displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B. The displayed first hold icon and the second hold icon displayed in the second hold icon display area 70D correspond to the second hold information, and the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C corresponds to the execution information.

(Specific example when variable production is started from waiting for customers)
A specific example when the variation effect is started from the customer waiting state will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 40. 38 is a timing chart in which the variation effect is started from the customer waiting state, and FIGS. 39 (a) to (f) and FIGS. 40 (g) to (k) are FIGS. 38 (a) to (k). It is a figure which shows the production example corresponding to.

First, the timing of T0 is the timing of the 0th frame after the customer waiting state is started. At this timing, the subtraction of the waiting time (30 seconds) for starting the customer waiting demonstration effect is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39 (a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. Further, "0" is displayed in the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold number display area 70F, and the hold icon and the icon TH are not displayed.

The timing of T1 is the timing when the first special symbol hold number (U1) increases from "0" to "1" (fourth frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first hold number and the non-animated increase display of the first hold icon (completed in one frame) are performed, and the first generation notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon is generated, is output. Is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39B, in the first image display device 70, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1". At the same time, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed in the normal size on the first display unit 70B1. Further, the first generation notification sound (picot) is output from the voice output device 9.

The timing of T2 is the timing when the first special symbol hold number (U1) decreases from "1" to "0" and the variation effect (variation display of the special symbol) by the normal variation pattern is started (start of the customer waiting state). 5th frame from). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, the non-animated reduction display of the first hold number, and the change display (decrease display) of the first hold icon to the icon are started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39 (c), in the first image display device 70, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0". At the same time, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 displayed on the first display unit 70B1 starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the reduced display is started in a state where the effect symbol 70a is not scrolled (updated to another effect symbol), and the special symbol TZ starts scrolling.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 10th frame after the output of the first generation notification sound is started (14th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the output of the first generation notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39 (d), in the first image display device 70, the movement (shift) of the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 to the icon display area 70C is continued, and the effect is produced. The reduced display of the symbol 70a continues.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 20th frame after the start of the change display (decrease display) of the first hold icon (25th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the change display of the first hold icon ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39 (e), in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon H11 moved from the first display unit 70B1 is located at the center of the icon display area 70C. At the same time as the icon TH, the reduced display of the effect symbol 70a is stopped.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 40th frame after the start of the variation effect (45th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39 (f), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling (moving downward) of the effect symbol 70a in the left variable display area, the central variable display is displayed. Scrolling (moving downward) of the effect symbol 70a in the area is started.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 50th frame after the start of the variation effect (55th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 40 (g), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling (moving downward) of the effect symbol 70a in the central variable display area, the right variable display is displayed. Scrolling (moving downward) of the effect symbol 70a in the area is started, and the effect symbol 70a is scrolled in all the variable display areas.

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 225th frame after the start of the variation effect (230th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 40 (h), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "3" is temporarily stopped (becomes a swaying state) in the variable display area on the left side. The scrolling of the effect symbol 70a continues in the variable display area on the center and the right side.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 255th frame from the start of the variation effect (260th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 40 (i), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "5" is temporarily stopped (becomes a swaying state) in the variable display area on the right side. The scrolling of the effect symbol 70a continues in the variable display area in the center.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 285th frame after the start of the variation effect (the 290th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 40 (j), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "6" is temporarily stopped (in a swaying state) in the central variable display area, and is lost. The combination of the effect symbols 70a indicating that there is is displayed.

The timing of T10 is the timing of the 300th frame after the start of the variation effect (the 305th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the variable display of the special symbol TZ end.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 40 (k), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a temporarily stopped in the left middle right variable display area is stopped and displayed, and the special symbol TZ is produced. The stop display is performed with the same combination "365" as the symbol 70a. Further, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

In this way, when the number of special symbol hold increases (changes from "0" to "1") while waiting for customers, the increase display by non-animation of the hold number and hold icon is the shortest for one frame. Since it ends in a period (time), it is possible to immediately shift to a variable effect (decrease display of the hold number and change display of the hold icon) so as not to be delayed.

In addition, the occurrence notification sound output in synchronization with the start of the increase display of the hold number and the hold icon is until the timing (frame update) after the end of the increase display of the hold number and the hold icon (frame update). To continue, make sure that the player is aware that the number of special symbol reservations has increased.

In addition, when the number of special symbol reservations decreases (changes from "1" to "0"), the reduction display of the hold number by non-animation and the change display of the hold icon by animation to the icon are executed. It is possible to make the player surely recognize that the number of special symbols reserved has decreased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, scrolling of the effect symbol (next effect) at the timing when the decrease display of the hold number is completed (frame update) rather than the timing when the change display of the hold icon to the icon is completed (frame update). Since the update to the symbol) is started, it becomes easy to grasp the progress of the game that the variable effect is started after the reserved memory is reduced, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the effect symbol does not scroll (it is not updated to the next effect symbol) until the change display of the hold icon to the icon is completed, and the effect symbol is completed at the timing when the change display of the hold icon is completed (frame update). Since scrolling (update to the next effect symbol) is started, it becomes easier to grasp the progress of the game that the variable effect is started after the hold memory is reduced, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

In addition, when the number of special symbol hold increases (changes from "0" to "1") while waiting for customers, the increase display of the hold icon is not executed non-animated, but rather than the increase display of the hold number. The animation may be executed over a plurality of frames (for example, 5 frames) so as to continue for a long time. By doing so, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the increase in the number of special symbol reservations, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Also, instead of starting the decrease display of the hold number and the change display (decrease display) of the hold icon to the icon at the same timing (frame update), the decrease display of the hold number is completed (frame update). If it is faster, you can start either one first. By doing so, it is possible to grasp at an early stage that the number of special symbol reservations has decreased while improving the degree of freedom in display control, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Also, instead of starting scrolling of the effect symbol (update to the next effect symbol) at the timing when the change display of the hold icon is completed (frame update) (start is delayed than usual), the change display of the hold icon is displayed. The scrolling of the effect symbol (update to the next effect symbol) may be started shortly before the completion (frame update).

(Specific example when the number of holds increases during variable production)
With reference to FIGS. 41 to 42, a specific example when the number of reservations increases during the fluctuation effect will be described. 41 is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases during the fluctuation effect, and FIGS. 42 (a) to 42 (c) are diagrams showing an example of the effect corresponding to FIGS. 41 (a) to 41 (c).

First, the timing of T1 is the timing that is the 50th frame after the fluctuation effect by the normal fluctuation pattern is started. At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 42 (a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are scrolled (moved downward). Further, "0" is displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F, and the icon (CD icon) TH is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the timing when the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) increases from "0" to "1" (60th frame from the start of the variation effect). At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first hold number and the increase display by the animation of the first hold icon are started, and the output of the notification sound when the icon is generated is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 42B, in the first image display device 70, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from “0” to “1”. At the same time, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed on the first display unit 70B1 in an extremely small size, and the enlarged display is started. Further, the first generation notification sound (picot) is output from the voice output device 9.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 10th frame after the start of the increase display of the first hold icon (70th frame from the start of the variation effect). At this timing, the increase display of the first hold icon ends, and the output of the first generation notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 42 (c), in the first image display device 70, the enlarged display of the first hold icon (CD icon) displayed on the first display unit 70B1 is completed and the normal size is used. Is displayed.

In this way, when the number of special symbol hold increases, the increase display by non-animation of the hold number and the increase display by the animation of the hold icon are executed, so that the player can tell that the number of special symbol hold has increased. It is possible to surely recognize the game and improve the fun of the game.

In addition, the number of special symbols held changes because the timing when the increase display of the hold number is completed (frame update) is earlier than the timing when the increase display of the hold icon is completed (frame update). While producing this, it becomes easier for the player to grasp that the number of special symbols held has increased due to the holding number, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the number of special symbol reservations increases during the execution of the variable effect, the increase display of the hold icon is executed for a longer period than when the number of special symbol reservations increases while waiting for customers. Therefore, it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the number of special symbol reservations has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the occurrence notification sound output in synchronization with the start of the increase display of the hold number and the hold icon ends in synchronization with the timing when the increase display of the hold icon ends (frame update), so that the number of special symbol hold is reduced. It is possible to effectively produce the increased number and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, since the period related to the increase display of the hold icon (10 frames) is shorter than the period related to the change display of the hold icon to the icon (20 frames), the variable effect is started. It can be emphasized and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Also, if the increase display of the hold number and the increase display of the hold icon are not started at the same timing (frame update), but the timing when the increase display of the hold number is completed (frame update) is earlier, whichever? May start first. By doing so, it is possible to grasp at an early stage that the number of special symbol reservations has increased while improving the degree of freedom in display control, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the period related to the increase display of the hold icon may be longer than the period related to the change display of the hold icon to the icon, instead of shortening the period related to the increase display of the hold icon. By doing so, it is possible to emphasize that the number of special symbol reservations has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, instead of shortening the period related to the increase display of the hold icon than the period related to the change display of the hold icon to the icon, both periods may be the same length.

(Specific example when the number of reservations increases immediately after the decrease)
A specific example of the case where the number of reservations increases immediately after the decrease will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 44. FIG. 43 is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases immediately after the decrease, and FIGS. 44 (a) to 44 (f) are diagrams showing examples of effects corresponding to FIGS. 43 (a) to (f).

First, the timing of T0 is the timing of the fifth frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed. At this timing, the stop display of the effect symbol 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 44 (a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbols 70a and the special symbol TZ of “4”, “6”, and “8” indicating the loss are stopped and displayed. ing. Further, "2" is displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second reserved number display area 70F. Further, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed on the first display unit 70B1, the first hold icon (CD icon) H12 is displayed on the second display unit 70B2, and the icon TH is not displayed. It is in a state.

The timing of T1 is the timing at which the variation effect (variation display of the special symbol) by the normal variation pattern is started (20th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, the reduction display of the first hold number by non-animation, the change display of the first hold icon by animation to the icon, and the reduction display by animation of the first hold icon are displayed. It will be started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 44 (b), in the first image display device 70, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1". .. Further, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 displayed on the first display unit 70B1 starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C, and is displayed on the second display unit 70B2. 1 The hold icon (CD icon) H12 starts moving (shifting) toward the first display unit 70B1. Further, the reduced display is started in a state where the effect symbol 70a is not scrolled (updated to another effect symbol), and the special symbol TZ starts scrolling.

The timing of T2 is the timing when the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (30th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first hold number is started, but since the change display and decrease display of the first hold icon are being executed, the increase display of the first hold icon and the notification when the icon is generated are being executed. The output of the generation notification sound, which is a sound, will be on standby.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 44 (c), in the first image display device 70, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2". At the same time, the reduced display of the effect symbol 70a continues.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 20th frame after the change display and the decrease display of the first hold icon are started (40th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the change display and the decrease display of the first hold icon end. In addition, the increase display by the animation of the first hold icon that has been waiting is started, and the output of the first generation notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon is generated, is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 44 (d), in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon H11 moved from the first display unit 70B1 is located at the center of the icon display area 70C, and the effect is produced. The reduced display of the symbol 70a is stopped. Further, the first hold icon (CD icon) H13 is displayed on the second display unit 70B2 in an extremely small size to start the enlarged display, and the output of the first generation notification sound (picot) from the voice output device 9 is started. To.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the fifth frame after the increase display of the first hold icon is started (the 45th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the increase display of the first hold icon and the output of the first generation notification sound continue.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 44 (e), in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon (CD icon) H13 is displayed in a small size on the second display unit 70B2, and the enlarged display is continued. At the same time, the output of the first generation notification sound (picot) from the voice output device 9 continues. Further, scrolling (moving downward) of the effect symbol 70a in the variable display area on the left side is started.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 10th frame after the increase display of the first hold icon is started (the 50th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the increase display of the first hold icon ends, and the output of the first generation notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 44 (f), in the first image display device 70, the enlarged display of the first hold icon (CD icon) displayed on the first display unit 70B1 is completed and the normal size is used. Is displayed. Further, scrolling (moving downward) of the effect symbol 70a in the central variable display area is started.

In this way, if the number of special symbols held increases during the execution of the change display of the hold icon to the icon and the decrease display of the hold icon, the change display and the decrease display are completed (frame update). Since the increase display of the hold number is started even before the timing, the player can be made to recognize that the number of special symbol hold has increased even while the change display and the decrease display of the hold icon are being executed. , It becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the number of special symbols held increases during the change display of the hold icon to the icon and the decrease display of the hold icon, the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the occurrence notification sound are waited (restricted). When the change display and decrease display of the hold icon are completed (frame update), the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the occurrence notification sound are started, so that it is difficult to grasp the transition of the number of special symbol hold. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of outputting the occurrence notification sound in synchronization with the increase display of the hold icon executed after the increase display of the hold number, the occurrence notification sound is output in synchronization with the increase display of the hold number. May be good.

In addition, when the change display and decrease display of the hold icon are completed (frame update), the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the occurrence notification sound are not started (starting is delayed from normal), but the change of the hold icon. The increase display of the hold icon and the output of the occurrence notification sound may be started shortly before the display and decrease display are completed (frame update). By doing so, it is possible to prevent it from becoming difficult to grasp the transition of the number of special symbols reserved, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, even if the number of special symbols held increases during the increase display of the hold icon, the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the occurrence notification sound are waited (restricted) as in the case of the change display or decrease display of the hold icon. On the other hand, the increase display of the hold number may be started, and the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the occurrence notification sound may be started at the timing when the increase display of the hold icon is completed (frame update).

(Specific example when the number of holds increases during a specific reach production)
A specific example of an increase in the number of holds during a specific reach effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. 45 is a timing chart in which the number of holds increases during the specific reach effect, and FIGS. 46 (a) to 46 (f) are diagrams showing an example of the effect corresponding to FIGS. 45 (a) to (f). ..

First, the timing of T1 is the timing of the 400th frame after the variation effect by the SP reach variation pattern is started. At this timing, the normal reach effect and the variable display of the special symbol TZ, which are executed before the SP reach effect, continue.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 46A, in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "7" is temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas, and the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped in the central variable display area. The fluctuation display of is continuing. Further, "1" is displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second reserved number display area 70F. Further, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed on the first display unit 70B1, and the icon (CD icon) TH is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the 90th frame from the start of the normal reach effect (430th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the development production for developing into the SP reach production is started.

Specifically, in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "7" temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas and the effect symbol 70a scrolling in the central variable display area move to the upper left of the screen. Start moving and reducing the display.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 15th frame after the start of the development effect (the 445th frame after the start of the variation effect). At this timing, the development production to develop into the SP reach production continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 46 (b), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "7" temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas and the central variable display area are scrolled. The effect symbol 70a is displayed at a position near the upper left of the screen, and is displayed in a size smaller than the normal size.

The timing of T4 is the 30th frame after the start of the development effect (46th frame after the start of the variation effect). At this timing, while the development production ends, the SP reach production starts.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 46 (c), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a in the left, middle, and right variable display areas is displayed in a reduced size in the upper left of the screen and in the center of the screen. The confrontation production in which the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 confront each other is started. Further, the hold icon (here, the hold icon display area 70B, the second hold icon display area 70D) is displayed in the hold icon display area (first hold icon display area 70B, second hold icon display area 70D), leaving the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C. The first hold icon only) is hidden together with the hold icon display area. Further, the special symbol TZ is in the reach state with the same "7" symbol as the effect symbol 70a.

The timing of T5 is the timing when the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (the 820th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first hold number is started, but since the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) is being executed, the increase display of the first hold icon at this timing or when the icon is generated. The generation notification sound, which is the notification sound, is not output.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 46 (d), in the first image display device 70, the first reserved number “1” displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes to “2”. , The final production of the confrontation production (decision production to notify whether it is a big hit or not) is being executed.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 420th frame after the start of the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) (the 880th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the result of the final production (decision production) of the confrontation production is derived.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 46 (e), in the first image display device 70, the effect that the ally character C2 wins over the enemy character C3 is performed, and the effect symbol 70a that is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the screen is displayed. Temporarily stops (becomes a swaying state) with a combination (“777”) indicating that is a big hit.

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 450th frame after the start of the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) (the 910th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) ends, and the return display and the increase display of the first hold icon by non-animation are performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 46 (f), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a reduced and displayed in the upper left of the screen is enlarged and displayed in the center of the screen and temporarily stopped (swayed state). become). Further, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is redisplayed on the first display unit 70B1, and the first hold icon (CD icon) H12 is displayed on the second display unit 70B2 in a normal size.

Finally, the effect symbol 70a temporarily stopped in the left, middle, and right variable display areas is stopped and displayed, and the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in the same combination as the effect symbol 70a, "777". Further, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

In this way, if the number of special symbol hold increases during the execution of the specific effect (SP reach effect), the hold number will be changed even before the timing when the specific effect ends (frame update). Since the increase display is started, it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

In addition, when the number of special symbol hold increases during the execution of the specific effect (SP reach effect), the execution of the increase display of the hold icon is waited (restricted), and the specific effect ends (reduced display). Since the increase display of the hold icon is started at the timing when the loss effect symbol or the jackpot effect symbol is enlarged (displayed) (frame update), it is possible to prevent it from becoming difficult to grasp the transition of the number of special symbol hold, and improve the interest of the game. It is possible to make it.

In addition, when the increase display of the hold icon is started at the timing when the specific effect (SP reach effect) is completed, the increase display of the hold icon by non-animation completed in one frame is performed, so that the timing when the number of special symbol hold increases. Even if there is an extreme difference between the timing of executing the increase display of the hold icon and the hold icon, it is possible to reduce the discomfort of the player and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the increase display of the hold icon is started at the timing when the specific effect (SP reach effect) ends, the generation notification sound is not output, so the number of special symbol hold increases at the timing when the specific effect ends due to the generation notification sound. It becomes difficult to misunderstand that it was done, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Even if the number of special symbols held increases more than once during the execution of the specific effect (SP reach effect), the increase display of the hold number is executed while the increase display of the hold icon is waited (restricted). However, it is advisable to collectively execute the increase display of the hold icon corresponding to the increase at the timing when the specific effect is completed (frame update) in one frame.

In addition, when the number of special symbol hold increases during the execution of the specific effect (SP reach effect), the generation notification sound is output in synchronization with the increase display of the hold number instead of not outputting the generation notification sound. good.

Further, although the SP reach effect is exemplified as the specific effect, the SPSP reach effect may be included in the specific effect, or the full rotation reach effect may be included in the specific effect.

(Specific example when the number of holds increases or decreases before and after the end of the specific game state)
A specific example when the number of holdings increases or decreases before and after the end of the specific gaming state will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 49. 47 is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases / decreases before and after the end of the specific gaming state, and FIGS. 48 (a) to (f) and FIGS. 49 (g) to (i) are FIGS. 47 (a) to (i). It is a figure which shows the production example corresponding to i).

First, the timing of T1 is the timing of the 400th frame after the last (100th) variation effect in the specific gaming state is started. At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 48A, "1" is displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E, and "4" is displayed in the second reserved number display area 70F. Further, the first hold icon display area 70B is erased, and the second hold icon (CD icon) H21 to H24 are displayed on the first display units 70D1 to the fourth display unit 70D4 of the second hold icon display area 70D, respectively. The icon TH is displayed. Further, the number of variable effects that can be executed in the specific game state (here, "0 remaining times") is displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the game ball is displayed at the upper right of the screen toward the right area of the game area 5a. A right-handed image MU prompting to fire is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the timing at which the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (the 415th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the increase display of the first hold number by non-animation is started, but since the first hold icon display area 70B is erased, it is an increase display of the first hold icon and a notification sound when the icon is generated. The generation notification sound will not be output.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 48 (b), in the first image display device 70, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2". At the same time, the scrolling of the effect symbol 70a continues.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 430th frame after the start of the variation effect. At this timing, the effect symbol 70a that has been variablely displayed in the variable display area on the left, middle, and right is temporarily stopped at the same time.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 48 (c), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "285" is temporarily stopped (in a swaying state) in the variable display area on the left, middle, and right. The combination of the effect symbols 70a indicating that the image is lost is displayed.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 15th frame after the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped (the 445th frame after the variation effect is started). At this timing, a result display showing the result of the game during a predetermined advantageous period (while the jackpot game and the specific game state continue) is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 48 (d), in the first image display device 70, the background image HG is darkened, and during the “special time end” indicating the end of the specific gaming state and the predetermined advantageous period. The number of big hit games executed The characters "big hit x 1" are displayed. In addition, the temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the screen.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 15th frame after the start of the result display (the 460th frame after the start of the variation effect). At this timing, the result display continues

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 48 (e), in the first image display device 70, the characters "TOTAL 1200pt" indicating the number of game balls acquired (paid out) during a predetermined advantageous period are displayed. It is additionally displayed.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 30th frame after the start of the result display (the 475th frame after the start of the variation effect). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the variable display of the special symbol TZ end.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 48 (f), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a temporarily stopped at the upper left of the screen moves to the center of the screen to stop and display, and the special symbol TZ is displayed. The stop display is made with the same combination "285" as the effect symbol 70a. Further, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

The timing of T7 is the timing (490th frame from the start of the variation effect) when the last (100th) variation effect in the specific gaming state ends and the first variation effect in the normal game state starts. At this timing, variable display of the effect symbol 70a and special symbol TZ, reduction display of the second hold number by non-animation, change display of the second hold icon by animation to the icon, reduction display by animation of the second hold icon, The non-animated return display of the first hold icon and the non-animated increase display of the first hold icon are started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49 (g), in the first image display device 70, the second reserved number displayed in the second reserved number display area 70F changes from “4” to “3”. At the same time, the second hold icon (CD icon) H21 displayed on the first display unit 70D1 starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C, and the second display unit 70D2 to the fourth display unit 70D4. The second hold icon (CD icon) H22 to H24 displayed on the screen starts moving (shifting) toward the adjacent display unit.

Further, the first hold icon display area is restored and the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is returned and displayed on the first display unit 70B1, and the first hold icon (CD icon) H12 is displayed on the second display unit 70B2. It is displayed in normal size. Further, the reduced display is started in a state where the effect symbol 70a is not scrolled (updated to another effect symbol), and the special symbol TZ starts scrolling. Further, in the upper left of the screen, a left-handed image HU urging the player to launch the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a is displayed.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 20th frame from the start of the change display and the decrease display of the second hold icon (510th frame from the start of the previous variation effect). At this timing, the change display and the decrease display of the second hold icon end.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49 (h), in the first image display device 70, the second hold icon H21 moved from the first display unit 70D1 is located at the center of the icon display area 70C. At the same time as the icon TH, the second hold icons H22 to H24 moved from the second display units 70D2 to 70D4 are located at the center of the adjacent display unit, and the reduced display of the effect symbol 70a is stopped.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 10th frame after the change display and the decrease display of the second hold icon are completed (520th frame from the start of the previous variation effect). At this timing, scrolling (moving downward) of the effect symbol 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49 (i), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling of the effect symbol 70a in the left variable display area, the effect symbol 70a in the central variable display area Scrolling (moving downward) is started.

In this way, when the first special symbol hold number (U1) increases during the specific game state, the increase display of the first hold icon is waited (restricted), while the increase display of the first hold number is started. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the number of special symbol reservations has increased even during the execution of the specific effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the number of first special symbol hold (U1) increases during the specific game state, the increase display of the first hold icon is performed at the timing when the specific game state (last variation effect in) ends (frame update). Therefore, even if the increase display of the first reserved number executed before that is overlooked, it is possible to recognize that the number of the first special symbol reserved has increased, and the interest of the game is improved. It becomes possible.

In addition, when the increase display of the first hold icon is started at the timing when the specific game state (the last variation effect in) ends, the increase display of the hold icon by non-animation completed in one frame is performed, so that the special symbol is held. Even if there is an extreme difference between the timing when the number increases and the timing when the increase display of the hold icon is executed, it is possible to reduce the discomfort of the player and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the increase display of the hold icon is started at the timing when the specific game state (the last variation effect in) ends, the generation notification sound is not output, so the special symbol is displayed at the timing when the generation notification sound ends the specific game state. It becomes difficult to misunderstand that the number of holdings has increased, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the effect symbol does not scroll (it is not updated to the next effect symbol) until the change display of the hold icon to the icon is completed, and the effect symbol is completed at the timing when the change display of the hold icon is completed (frame update). Since scrolling (update to the next effect symbol) is started, it becomes easier to grasp the progress of the effect during the variable effect, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Even if the number of 1st special symbol hold increases by a plurality during the specific game state, the hold icon increase display is waited (restricted) while the hold number increase display is executed. It suffices to collectively execute the increase display of the hold icon by the amount increased at the timing when the specific game state (the last variation effect in) ends (frame update) in one frame.

Further, when the number of first special symbol reservations increases during the specific game state, the generation notification sound may be output in synchronization with the increase display of the reservation number instead of not outputting the generation notification sound.

In the present embodiment, the first hold icon display area 70B and the second hold icon display area 70D are set (displayed) in the normal gaming state, but the second hold icon display area 70D is set (displayed). Instead, only the first hold icon display area 70B may be set (displayed).

Further, in the present embodiment, the icon display area 70C is set (displayed) regardless of whether or not a specific effect (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, full rotation reach effect) is executed during the variable effect. However, the icon may be hidden without setting (displaying) the icon display area 70C during the execution of the specific effect, or the icon display area 70C may not be set (displayed) during the execution of the specific effect. The icon may be hidden.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F are set (displayed) in the first image display device 70, but are set in the second image display device 71 (in this embodiment). It may be set (displayed) or set (displayed) on a dedicated display device (for example, 7-segment LED, dot matrix, dedicated LED, etc.) different from the image display device. Then, when setting to a dedicated LED, it is preferable to display the number of special symbol reservations depending on the lighting color and lighting / blinking mode of the LED.

(Contents of the invention described in the first embodiment above)
In the conventional gaming machine, when the starting condition is satisfied, the determination information as to whether or not to execute the special game advantageous to the player is acquired, and the determination information is stored. Then, when the determination condition is satisfied, the stored determination information is determined, and the variation effect according to the result of the determination is executed, and when the variation effect becomes a special result, the special game is executed. Some such gaming machines display a reserved image corresponding to undetermined determination information (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-33530). In addition, the gaming machine improves the interest of the game by changing the normal reserved image into a reserved image in a display mode suggesting that the variation effect may have a special result. However, there is still room for improvement in the above-mentioned gaming machine in order to improve the interest of the game.

As a first configuration for solving the above problems, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and the command from the main control means are used. In a gaming machine provided with a secondary control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the production of a game based on the above, the main control means determines whether or not to perform a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The determination means (main CPU 110a) to be performed and the holding means (main RAM 110c) capable of holding the right of the judgment are provided, and the slave control means holds a hold image (hold icon) corresponding to the hold of the right. An image display means (display / voice control unit 140) to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70) and a predetermined notification effect (icon generation (change)) on the effect means (audio output device 9) in the progress of the game. An effect executing means (display / voice control unit 140) for executing a notification sound) is provided, and the image display means is configured to update an image to be displayed on the display means at a predetermined frame update timing. It is possible to perform a change effect (icon change effect) that changes from the hold image to a special hold image indicating the possibility of performing the special game, and the change effect is performed from the main control means. The first change effect (change effect at the time of winning) executed at the frame update timing in response to the reception of the transmitted command indicating that the right has occurred (starting port winning designation command), and the transmission from the main control means. Includes a second change effect (normal change pattern 02, character action change pattern 01, and symbol action change pattern 01) executed at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving a command (variation pattern designation command) indicating the result of the determination. The effect executing means starts the notification effect at the frame update timing at which the first change effect is started, and ends the notification effect at a frame update timing different from the frame update timing at which the first change effect ends. I try to do it. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a second configuration for solving the above problems, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and the command from the main control means are used. In a gaming machine provided with a secondary control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the production of a game based on the above, the main control means determines whether or not to perform a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. A determination means (main CPU 110a) to be performed, a holding means (main RAM 110c) capable of holding the right of the determination, and a variation control means for displaying the symbol in a variable manner and then stopping and displaying the symbol based on the result of the determination. , And the subordinate control means displays an image display means (display / voice control unit 140) that displays a hold image (hold icon) corresponding to the held right on the display means (first image display device 70). The image is provided with an effect executing means (display / voice control unit 140) for causing the effect means (voice output device 9) to execute a predetermined notification effect (icon generation (change) notification sound) in the progress of the game. The display means is configured to update the image to be displayed on the display means at each predetermined frame update timing, and changes from the hold image to a special hold image indicating the possibility of performing the special game. It is possible to perform a change effect (icon change effect), and the change effect is to receive a command (variation pattern designation command) indicating that the variation display of the symbol transmitted from the main control means is started. Predetermined frame update timing after receiving the first change effect (normal change pattern 01) executed at the corresponding frame update timing and the command (variation pattern designation command) indicating the result of the determination transmitted from the main control means. The effect executing means includes a second change effect (normal change pattern 02, character action change pattern 01, and symbol action change pattern 01) to be executed in the above, and the effect execution means is a frame different from the frame update timing at which the first change effect ends. The notification effect is terminated at the update timing. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a third configuration for solving the above problems, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and the command from the main control means are used. In a gaming machine provided with a secondary control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the production of a game based on the above, the main control means determines whether or not to perform a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. A determination means (main CPU 110a) to be performed, a holding means (main RAM 110c) capable of holding the right of the determination, and a variation control means (main RAM 110c) for displaying the symbol in a variable manner and then stopping and displaying the symbol based on the result of the determination. The subordinate control means includes a main CPU 110a), and the slave control means corresponds to a pre-judgment pending image (holding icon) corresponding to the reserved right and the right after the determination is made for the right. An image display means (display / voice control unit 140) for displaying the pending image (corresponding icon) after the determination to be performed on the display means (first image display device 70), and an effect means (voice output device 9) in the progress of the game. The image display means is provided with an effect execution means (display / voice control unit 140) for executing a predetermined notification effect (icon generation (change) notification sound), and the image display means displays the display every time a predetermined frame update timing is reached. It is configured to update the image to be displayed on the means, and from the pre-judgment hold image or the post-judgment hold image to the pre-judgment special hold image or the post-judgment special hold image indicating the possibility of performing the special game. It is possible to perform a change effect (icon change effect) to be changed, and the change effect corresponds to a command (variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control means when the variation display of the symbol starts. A predetermined frame after receiving the first change effect (normal change pattern 01) executed at the frame update timing and the command (variation pattern designation command) indicating the result of the determination transmitted from the main control means. The effect executing means includes a second change effect (normal change pattern 02, character action change pattern 01, and symbol action change pattern 01) executed at the update timing, and the effect execution means is performed at the frame update timing at which the first change effect is started. The post-determination special hold image is more than the case where the notification effect is started and the notification effect is ended at a frame update timing different from the frame update timing at which the first change effect ends, and the image is changed to the pre-determination special hold image. The second change is the case of changing to The rate at which the production is executed is high. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and the command from the main control means are used. In a gaming machine provided with a secondary control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the production of a game based on the above, the main control means determines whether or not to perform a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The determination means (main CPU 110a) to be performed, the holding means (main RAM 110c) capable of holding a predetermined number of the judgment rights, and the slave control means are holding images (holding icons) corresponding to the holding rights. ) Is displayed on the display means (first image display device 70), and a predetermined notification effect (icon generation (icon generation (icon generation)) is performed on the effect means (audio output device 9) during the progress of the game. An effect executing means (display / voice control unit 140) for executing a change) notification sound) is provided, and the image display means updates an image to be displayed on the display means every time a predetermined frame update timing is reached. It is possible to perform a change effect (icon change effect) that changes from the hold image to a special hold image indicating the possibility of performing the special game, and the change effect is suspended. The first change effect executed at the frame update timing according to the command (start opening prize designation command, variation pattern designation command, special symbol storage designation command) transmitted from the main control means when the number of the rights is changed. (Change effect at the time of winning, normal change pattern 01) and a command (variation pattern designation command) indicating the result of the determination transmitted from the main control means are executed at a predetermined frame update timing. The display mode of the special reserved image includes the second change effect (normal change pattern 01, character action change pattern 01, and symbol action change pattern 01), and the display mode of the special reserved image is the first display mode (blue character icon) and the first display mode. It has a second display mode (red character icon) that is more likely to perform the special game than the mode, and the effect executing means starts the notification effect at the frame update timing when the first change effect is started. Then, the notification effect is started at the frame update timing at which the first change effect is started, and the notification effect is ended at a frame update timing different from the frame update timing at which the first change effect ends. The second change effect is executed more than when the change effect is executed. When it is changed to the second display mode, and when it changes to the second display mode in the first change effect, the number of reserved rights is higher than when the number of the reserved rights is the first number. The second number, which is larger than the first number, is more likely to play the special game. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

The "special hold image" and "special hold image before judgment" are those whose shape is changed from the normal hold icon, those whose color is changed, and those whose color indicates the degree of expectation of winning a big hit around the hold icon. An effect is displayed, a character showing the expectation of winning a big hit is displayed around (near) the hold icon, and a character image (for example, "SP") suggesting an effect to be executed around (near) the hold icon. , "Pseudo-ren", etc.) are included.

In addition, the "special hold image after judgment" is an image in which the shape is changed from the normal icon, a color is changed, and an effect of a color indicating the degree of expectation of winning a big hit is displayed around the icon. A character that displays a character indicating the degree of expectation of a big hit is displayed around (nearby) the icon, and a character image (for example, "SP" or "pseudo-ream") that suggests an effect to be executed is displayed around (near) the icon. ) Is included.

Further, the "first display mode" includes a special icon (blinking CD icon), a blue character icon, a green character icon, and the like.
Further, the "second display mode" includes a red character icon, a rainbow character icon, and the like.

Further, the "post-judgment hold image" and the "post-judgment special hold image" are displayed from the start to the end of the variation effect, displayed only for a predetermined period after the start of the variation effect, and the variation. The specific period (SP reach, SPSP reach, etc.) during the production includes those whose display is erased.

(Contents of the invention described in the second embodiment)
In the conventional gaming machine, the determination information acquired when the acquisition condition is satisfied is stored as a hold memory, and based on the determination information, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and the determination result is used. It is common to perform variable effects based on this. In such a gaming machine, an increase display or a decrease display of the hold image corresponding to each of the hold storage is performed, or an execution image corresponding to the hold storage in which the variation effect is executed is displayed. It was intended to make the player grasp the progress of the game (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-018225). However, the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 has a problem that it is difficult to immediately grasp the reserved storage number when the reserved storage number changes.

As the first configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a secondary control means (effect) for controlling the production of the game based on a command from the main control means. In the game machine provided with the control board 130), the main control means is based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the starting port). It is provided with a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been executed as reserved storage. The control means includes a variation effect execution means capable of executing a variation effect according to the result of the determination by the image display means (image display device), a first hold information (holding number) indicating the number of hold storages, and the above. The image display means includes information display means capable of displaying a second hold information (hold icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the hold storages, and the image display means is provided every time a predetermined frame update timing (1 / 30 ms) is reached. The display image is updated to, and when the number of the reserved storages is reduced, the information display means can execute the reduced display of the first reserved information and the reduced display of the second reserved information, and the second The decrease display of the first hold information (to the hold number subtracted by 1) is more than the frame update timing at which the decrease display of the hold information (movement to the center of the adjacent display unit in the hold icon display area) is completed. The frame update timing when the update) is completed is earlier. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp the number of reserved storages.

As a second configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a secondary control means (effect) for controlling the production of the game based on a command from the main control means. In the game machine provided with the control board 130), the main control means is based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the starting port). It is provided with a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been executed as reserved storage. The control means includes a variation effect execution means capable of executing a variation effect according to the result of the determination by the image display means (image display device), a first hold information (holding number) indicating the number of hold storages, and the above. The image display means includes information display means capable of displaying a second hold information (hold icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the hold storages, and the image display means is provided every time a predetermined frame update timing (1 / 30 ms) is reached. When the number of the reserved storages is reduced, the display image is updated, and the information display means executes the reduced display of the first reserved information and the second reserved information from which the variation effect is started (the icon). ) Can be executed, and the frame update that completes the change display (movement from the hold icon display area to the center of the icon display area) of the second hold information to the execution information. The frame update timing at which the reduction display of the first hold information (update to the hold number subtracted by 1) is completed is earlier than the timing. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp the number of reserved storages.

As a third configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a secondary control means (effect) for controlling the production of the game based on a command from the main control means. In the game machine provided with the control board 130), the main control means is based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the starting port). It is provided with a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been executed as reserved storage. The control means includes a variation effect execution means capable of executing a variation effect according to the result of the determination by the image display means (image display device), a first hold information (holding number) indicating the number of hold storages, and the above. The image display means includes information display means capable of displaying a second hold information (hold icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the hold storages, and the image display means is provided every time a predetermined frame update timing (1 / 30 ms) is reached. The display image is updated to, and when the number of the reserved storages decreases, the information display means can execute the reduced display of the first reserved information and the reduced display of the second reserved information, and the reserved storages can be executed. When the number of the first reserved information increases, the increase display of the first reserved information and the increased display of the second reserved information can be executed, and when the number of the reserved storage increases during the decrease display of the second reserved information. , Even before the frame update timing at which the decrease display of the second hold information (movement to the center of the adjacent display unit in the hold icon display area) is completed, the increase display of the first hold information ( Update to the reserved number added by 1) is started. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp the number of reserved storages.

As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a secondary control means (main control means) for controlling the production of the game based on a command from the main control means. In the game machine provided with the effect control board 130), the main control means is based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the starting port). , A determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been executed as reserved storage. The slave control means includes a variation effect execution means capable of executing a variation effect according to the result of the determination by the image display means (image display device), a first hold information (hold number) indicating the number of hold storages, and a hold number. The image display means includes information display means capable of displaying a second hold information (hold icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the hold storages, and the image display means has a predetermined frame update timing (1 / 30 ms). The display image is updated every time, and when the number of the reserved storages decreases, the information display means executes the reduced display of the first reserved information and the second reserved information from which the variable display is started (the relevant). It is possible to execute the change display to be changed to the icon), and when the number of the reserved storages increases, the increased display of the first reserved information and the increased display of the second reserved information can be executed. 2 If the number of reserved storages increases during the display of changes in the reserved information, the frame update that completes the reduced display of the second reserved information (movement from the reserved icon display area to the center of the icon display area). Even before the timing, the increase display (change to the hold number added by 1) of the first hold information is started. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp the number of reserved storages.

As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a secondary control means (effect) for controlling the production of the game based on a command from the main control means. In the game machine provided with the control board 130), the main control means is based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the starting port). It is provided with a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been executed as reserved storage. The control means includes a variation effect execution means capable of executing a variation effect according to the result of the determination by the image display means (image display device), a first hold information (holding number) indicating the number of hold storages, and the above. The image display means includes information display means capable of displaying a second hold information (hold icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the hold storages, and the image display means is provided every time a predetermined frame update timing (1 / 30 ms) is reached. The display image is updated, and when the number of the reserved storages increases, the information display means can execute the increased display of the first reserved information and the increased display of the second reserved information, and the variation effect. When the number of hold storages increases during the execution of, the frame update timing at which the increase display of the second hold information (enlargement of the hold icon additionally displayed in the hold icon display area to the normal size) is completed. The frame update timing at which the increase display of the first hold information (update to the hold number added by 1) is completed is earlier than that. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp the number of reserved storages.

As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a secondary control means (effect) for controlling the production of the game based on a command from the main control means. In the game machine provided with the control board 130), the main control means is based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the starting port). It is provided with a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been executed as reserved storage. The control means includes a variation effect execution means capable of executing a variation effect according to the result of the determination by the image display means (image display device), a first hold information (holding number) indicating the number of hold storages, and the above. The information display means capable of displaying a second hold information (hold icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the hold storages is provided, and the variable effect executing means executes the special game during the execution of the variable effect. It is possible to execute a specific effect (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, full rotation reach effect), and the information display means increases the display of the first hold information and the increase display of the first hold information when the number of hold storages increases. It is possible to execute the increase display of the second hold information, and when the number of the hold memories increases during the execution of the specific effect, the increase display of the first hold information (update to the hold number added by 1). ) Is executed, but the increase display of the second hold information is not executed until a predetermined condition is satisfied (the specific effect is completed, the lost effect symbol or the jackpot effect symbol that has been reduced and displayed is enlarged and displayed). There is. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp the number of reserved storages.

As a seventh configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a secondary control means for controlling the production of the game based on a command from the main control means, and a slave control means. In the game machine provided with the above, the main control means is specially advantageous to the player based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the starting port). A determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a game (big hit game), a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been executed as hold storage, a normal game state, and a normal game state. A game state control means capable of controlling a specific game state advantageous to the player is provided, and the slave control means can execute a variation effect according to the result of the determination by the image display means (image display device). Information display means capable of displaying a variable effect executing means, a first hold information (hold number) indicating the number of hold storages, and a second hold information (hold icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the hold storages. The information display means can execute an increase display of the first hold information and an increase display of the second hold information when the number of the hold storage increases, and the storage means can execute the increase display of the first hold information. The determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition (entry of the game ball into the first start port) is stored as the first hold storage, and the second acquisition condition is satisfied (entrance of the game ball into the second start opening). The determination information based on the ball) is stored as the second hold storage, and when the number of the first hold storage increases in the specific gaming state, the increase display of the first hold information (1 added to the hold number) is displayed. (Update) is executed, but the increase display of the second hold information is not executed until a predetermined condition is satisfied (the last variation effect in the specific gaming state is completed and the normal gaming state is restored). By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp the number of reserved storages.

(Third Embodiment)
Hereinafter, the third embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. Here, the same parts as those of the first and second embodiments will be omitted, and different parts will be described.

In the third embodiment, in the game effect, the emphasis effect executed to emphasize the main effect during the execution of the main effect that directs the progress of the game will be described.

First, a variable effect executed based on the variable effect pattern will be described.
50 and 51 are diagrams showing a variation effect pattern determination table referred to when determining a variation effect pattern. Specifically, FIG. 50 is a variation effect pattern determination table for loss that is referred to when the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure determination information is loss, and FIG. 51 is the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure determination information. Is a variation effect pattern determination table for a jackpot that is referred to when is a jackpot.

As shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, the variation effect pattern determination table includes the current gaming state, the special figure variation pattern designation command received from the main control board 110, and the selection rate (%) of each variation effect pattern. , The determined variable effect patterns are associated with each other, and the effect configuration (type of game effect) of each variable effect pattern is described in the rightmost column for reference.

The variation effect pattern is an audio output device 9, a frame lighting device 10, an effect button device 16, a selection button device 18, a first image display device 70, a second image display device 71, and a movable one during a variation display of a special symbol. It is the effect mode of the variable effect performed by using the effect device such as the effect device 73 and the lighting device 74 for the board, and the effect configuration (effect mode) such as the content of the reach effect is described.

For example, to explain the case where the variation effect pattern determination table for loss in FIG. 50 is used to determine the variation effect pattern, the current gaming state is "non-time saving gaming state (normal gaming state)" and the special figure variation pattern. When the designated command is "E4H, 05H", the variable effect pattern 09 is determined at a rate of 40%, the variable effect pattern 10 is determined at a rate of 30%, and the variable effect pattern 11 is determined at a rate of 20%. It is determined, and the variable effect pattern 12 is determined at a rate of 10%.

Here, the "normal variation" indicates that the effect symbol 70a performs a normal variation effect in which a reach state does not occur.
The "long fluctuation" indicates that a long fluctuation effect that is longer than the normal variation effect and does not generate a reach state is performed.
The "shortened variation" indicates that the shortened variation effect is performed, which is shorter than the normal variation effect and does not generate a reach state.
The "ultra-shortening variation" indicates that the ultra-shortening variation effect is performed, which is shorter than the shortened variation effect and does not generate a reach state.

"Pseudo-fanning fluctuation" means that a pseudo-continuous notice is executed in which the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped and re-variated (pseudo-continuous effect) one or more times during one variation effect (variation display of a special symbol). As a result of executing the fanning effect of whether or not, it is shown that the pseudo fanning variation effect is executed, which is a result indicating that the pseudo continuous notice is not executed.
The "pseudo 1" indicates that the first temporary stop and re-variation (pseudo continuous effect) of the effect symbol 70a is executed as a pseudo continuous notice.
The "pseudo 2" indicates that the second temporary stop and re-variation (pseudo continuous effect) of the effect symbol 70a is executed as a pseudo continuous notice.
The "pseudo 3" indicates that the third temporary stop and re-variation (pseudo continuous effect) of the effect symbol 70a is executed as a pseudo continuous notice.

The first feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 50 and 51 is that if the reach effect to be executed is the same variation effect pattern, the pseudo continuous advance notice is more than the variation effect pattern in which the pseudo continuous advance notice is not executed. One point is that the variable production pattern that is executed has a higher expectation of winning a big hit. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation as to whether or not the pseudo-continuous notice is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 50 and 51 is N (normal) if the number of executions of the temporary stop and re-variation (pseudo-continuous effect) of the effect symbol 70a is the same. The variable effect pattern that sandwiches the N (normal) reach effect has a higher expectation of winning a big hit than the variable effect pattern that does not sandwich the reach effect. It is possible to raise the player's expectation about when the pseudo-continuous production is performed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 50 and 51 is that if the variation effect pattern is such that the SPSP reach effect is finally performed, the SP reach effect is not executed before the SPSP reach effect. The variable effect pattern in which the SP reach effect is executed before the SPSP reach effect has a higher expectation of winning a big hit (the jackpot game is more likely to be executed) than the pattern. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the progress of the reach production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The above-mentioned variation effect pattern determination table is merely an example of a characteristic table among the tables in the present embodiment, and in addition to this, a variation effect pattern (not shown) is listed in the progress of the game. Many judgment tables are provided.

As shown in FIG. 52 (1), in the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71, various game effects are performed according to the progress of the game, and as the game effect, the variable display of the special symbol is not displayed. There are a customer waiting effect performed during execution, a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of the effect symbol 70a performed during execution of the variable display of the special symbol, a big hit effect performed during execution of the big hit game, and the like.

In the customer waiting effect, the variable effect, and the jackpot effect, in the display area (display screen) including the central area of the display unit of the first image display device 70, various types of effect symbols, characters, characters, and backgrounds are mainly used. The main effects of the display mode are performed, and these main effects suggest the degree of expectation of winning a big hit, suggest an effect mode corresponding to the current state of the game, and notify whether or not the big hit has been won.

The emphasis effect is the outer edge of the display area of the main effect when the main effect is executed on the display unit of the first image display device 70 in various game effects (customer waiting effect, variable effect, jackpot effect, etc.). In at least a part of the display area in the direction (for example, the display area near the left and right outer edges of the display unit), an enhancement effect image that attracts and attracts the player is displayed to add an effect that appeals to the player's vision. And improve the interest of the production.

As shown in FIG. 52 (2), the highlighting effect includes a highlighting color maintaining effect and a repeating highlighting effect in which the display mode of the highlighting effect image is different from that of the highlighting color maintaining effect. It is possible to execute either a highlighting color effect or a repetitive emphasis effect depending on the display mode of the main effect.

The highlight color maintenance effect is, for example, when an effect suggesting a big hit winning expectation such as a pseudo continuous notice, a reach effect, a look-ahead continuous notice, etc. is performed based on the variable effect pattern executed in the variable effect. Highlighting is performed with an effect image of a predetermined color, shape, and size according to the content of the production mode of the main production performed in each of the above, and this highlighting is continued for a predetermined period in the display area near the outer edge of the display unit. And do it. By this highlighting color maintenance effect, it is possible to add a visual effect to the effect content of the main effect.

Further, in the highlight display color maintenance effect, a plurality of types of change display patterns (change display patterns of color, shape, and size) are provided. For example, as a color change display pattern of an effect image, "blue" → "yellow" → It has a first change display pattern that changes to "green" and a second change display pattern that changes from "blue" → "green" → "red". When the first change display pattern is performed, a blue effect image After the display of is maintained for a certain period of time, the color changes step by step based on the change display pattern to be executed, such as changing to the display of the yellow effect image.

On the other hand, the repetitive emphasis effect is, for example, various notification effects such as a jackpot symbol stop display effect, a result notification effect (big hit decision effect, promotion effect, revival effect, etc.), a jackpot effect, a mode notification effect, and a zone notification effect. When is performed, depending on the content of the production mode of the main production performed in each of those productions, a stronger glow is emitted in the display area in the outer edge direction than the display area of the main production, and the change display of the glow color is performed. Is highlighted with a flash image of a light emitting mode in which is repeatedly performed. By this repetitive emphasis effect, it is possible to add a visual effect that makes the effect symbol display, character display, and character display of the main effect stand out.

In the repetitive emphasis effect, one change display pattern associated with each type of effect mode of the main effect to be executed is provided, and the change display pattern is, for example, two types of display colors (for example, "red"). The display in which "yellow") changes alternately is repeated, and the display color does not change step by step.

Next, the highlight color maintenance effect corresponding to the main effect performed by the pseudo continuous notice will be described.
As shown in FIG. 53, when the pseudo-continuous notice is performed in the variable effect, the highlight display color maintenance effect by the effect image of a predetermined shape is performed according to the effect pattern executed by the pseudo-continuous notice and the effect mode of the main effect by the character. Will be done.

Here, in the pseudo-continuous notice, in the pseudo-continuous effect (temporary stop and re-variation of the effect symbol 70a), the plurality of effect symbols 70a do not become a specific combination display mode (for example, a combination display mode of reach loss). (For example, the chance symbol of "246") is temporarily stopped. It should be noted that the effect symbol 70a may be temporarily stopped by the pseudo-continuous symbol without being temporarily stopped by the chance symbol. The pseudo-ream symbol is a special symbol including the display of the character symbols of "ream" and "re" and the message of "NEXT", which suggests the execution of the pseudo-ream effect. This pseudo-ream symbol is a symbol that is not displayed when it is normally changed, and is a special symbol that is displayed only when the pseudo-ream effect is executed.

Pseudo-ream symbols (ream symbols and NEXT symbols) are displayed in one of the display colors of "yellow", "green", and "red", and the jackpot winning expectation is in the order of "yellow" <"green" <"red". The degree is set to be high, and the display color of the pseudo-ream pattern suggests the degree of expectation of winning a big hit. When the red pseudo-ream symbol is temporarily stopped, it is suggested that the jackpot winning (for example, winning the probabilistic jackpot) is rich. Each display color of the pseudo-continuous symbol is determined based on the jackpot determination result of the special figure determination information and the variable effect pattern to be executed.

In addition, in the pseudo continuous notice, as the main production, a battle production by a character, a story production, and a dialogue display production (for example, "continuation", "may continue ??", "chance !!", etc. A suggestion effect that suggests whether or not the jackpot winning expectation and the pseudo-continuous effect are continuously executed is performed by any one of a plurality of types of effect moving images such as (display of a character image). When the suggestion effect is performed, the effect image of the suggestion effect is displayed on a layer higher than the variable display image of the effect symbol.

In the pseudo continuous notice, the jackpot winning expectation is set to increase as the number of executions of the pseudo continuous effect (pseudo 1 to 3) increases. Further, the reach effect may be finally performed after the pseudo continuous notice is executed. In this case, for example, when the reach effect executed after the re-variation of the effect symbol of the pseudo 1 and the reach effect executed after the re-variation of the effect symbol of the pseudo 2 have the same effect content (aspect), the effect of the pseudo 2 The reach effect after the re-variation of the symbol has a higher expectation of winning a big hit than the reach effect after the re-variation of the pseudo 1 effect symbol. It should be noted that a "pseudo 4" in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed four times may be set so that a probable change jackpot is obtained via the reach effect after the pseudo-continuous notice is executed.

Further, the rate of occurrence of the type of reach effect may be changed depending on the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous effect. For example, the pseudo-continuous production may be performed twice to be "reach confirmed", and the pseudo-continuous production may be performed three times to be "SP reach confirmed". Further, during the execution of the pseudo-continuous notice, the number of executed pseudo-continuous effects (for example, “x2”) may be displayed on the display unit of the first image display device 70.

In the highlighting color maintenance effect, a flame effect image having a shape imitating a flame is displayed, and the display color of the flame effect image is used to highlight the player's visual sense to strongly appeal the jackpot winning expectation. Specifically, in the first image display device 70, when the effect symbol is re-variated or the suggestion effect is performed by the character in the display area including the central area of the display unit, the display area near the left and right outer edges of the display unit is performed. The flame effect image in which a flame of a predetermined display color burns in a band shape is highlighted.

As shown in FIG. 53, the display color of the flame effect image is displayed as any of "yellow", "green", and "red", and each of the three display colors is associated with the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous effect. ing. Specifically, when the first pseudo-ream effect is performed, a yellow flame effect image is displayed, and when the second pseudo-ream effect is performed, a green effect image is displayed and the third pseudo-ream effect is performed. When done, a red flame effect image is displayed. The flame effect image of each display color associated with the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous effect continues to be displayed while the re-variation of the effect symbol 70a or the suggestion effect is performed, and when the next pseudo-continuous effect is not performed. Is finished.

The jackpot winning expectation related to the display color of the flame effect image is in the order of "yellow" <"green" <"red" on the assumption that the jackpot winning expectation increases as the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous production increases. The expectation of winning a big hit is high, and as the number of times the pseudo-continuous production is executed increases, the display color of the flame effect image changes step by step in the order of "yellow" → "green" → "red". When the fourth pseudo-continuous production is performed, a rainbow-colored flame effect image may be displayed. The rainbow-colored flame effect image suggests that the winning jackpot has been confirmed.

For example, in a variation effect, when the effect symbol of normal variation (first variation) is temporarily stopped and then re-variates (first pseudo-continuous effect: pseudo 1), a yellow flame effect image is displayed and the effect symbol is displayed. The yellow flame effect image is continuously displayed during the re-variation of 70a, and when the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped and / or re-variable (second pseudo-continuous effect: pseudo 2), the green flame effect image. And the green flame effect image is continuously displayed during the re-variation of the effect symbol 70a. That is, the display color of the flame effect image changes each time the pseudo-continuous effect is performed. The display color of the flame effect image allows the player to grasp the number of executions of the pseudo-ream effect and the expectation of winning the jackpot, and the display color of the flame effect image changes to give the player a feeling of expectation for winning the jackpot. It will be possible to increase it.

Here, in the variable effect in which the pseudo continuous notice is executed, in the case of a big hit, the pseudo continuous notice of the pseudo 3 is set to be executed at a higher rate than the pseudo continuous notice of the pseudo 1 and the pseudo 2. In the case of loss, the pseudo-continuous notice of pseudo 1 is set to be executed at a higher rate than the pseudo-continuous notice of pseudo 2 and pseudo 3 (see FIGS. 50 and 51). Therefore, when a pseudo continuous notice is performed in the fluctuation effect of the loss, it is difficult to change from the display of the yellow flame effect image to the red flame effect image. On the other hand, when a pseudo continuous notice is performed in the fluctuation effect of the jackpot, the yellow flame effect image is likely to change from the start of the display to the red flame effect image.

It should be noted that the shape, display size, and movement of the effect may be changed without changing the display color of the effect image according to the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous effect. For example, as the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous effect increases, the display size of the flame effect image is gradually increased for highlighting.

FIG. 54 is a diagram showing an example of a suggestion effect determination table referred to when a story effect is executed as a suggestion effect performed by a pseudo continuous notice. The suggestion effect determination table is associated with each of the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous effect, the random value for determining the effect content of the suggestion effect, and the effect content (effects A to D) of the suggested effect to be selected. Random values for determining the content of the production are assigned so as to have the selection rate (%) shown. Then, one effect content is determined from a plurality of types of effect contents based on the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous effect and the acquired random value for determining the effect content.

When the suggestion effect is performed by the pseudo continuous notice of the pseudo 2, the effect A, which has a lower expectation of winning a big hit than the effects B to D, is selected more frequently than the effects B to D, while the pseudo 3 When the suggestion effect is performed by the pseudo-continuous notice, the effect D, which has a higher expectation of winning a big hit than the effects A to C, is selected more frequently than the effects A to C, that is, the number of times the pseudo-continuous effect is executed is large. As a result, the proportion of the effect content of the suggestion effect, which has a high expectation of winning the jackpot, is increasing, and the effect content of the suggestion effect can greatly shake the player's expectation for the jackpot game.

FIG. 55 is a diagram showing the degree of expectation of winning a big hit of TOTAL based on the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous effect, the effect content of the suggestion effect, and the display color of the flame effect. As shown in FIG. 55, as the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous production increases, the expectation of winning the big hit of TOTAL increases. Therefore, it is possible to raise the expectation of the player to win the big hit.

For example, when the pseudo continuous notice of pseudo 2 is performed, the display color of the flame effect image changes from "yellow" to "green" when the second pseudo continuous effect is performed, and the effect symbol 70a is being re-changed. When the effect D is executed, the expectation of winning the big hit of TOTAL is higher than when the effects A to C are executed. For example, when the green flame effect image is displayed, the expectation of winning the big hit of TOTOAL is higher when the suggestion effect of the effect D is performed than when the suggestion effect of the effect A is performed. Therefore, even if the green flame effect image is displayed, the player can have an expectation of winning a big hit depending on the production content of the suggestion effect.

In this way, in the pseudo-continuous notice, when the effect symbol 70a is re-changing or the suggestion effect is performed by the character, the highlighted display color is maintained by the display color of the flame effect image corresponding to the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous effect. As the production is performed and the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous production increases, the display color of the flame effect image changes to the display color one step higher than the display color being displayed, so the jackpot By visually appealing that the possibility of winning will increase and effectively inspiring the player's expectations, it is possible to further raise the player's attention to the pseudo-continuous notice and improve the interest of the game. It becomes.

Next, the highlight color maintenance effect corresponding to the main effect performed in the reach effect will be described.
The reach production includes the above-mentioned normal reach production, SP reach production, SPSP reach production and full rotation reach production (big hit confirmed production), and the jackpot winning expectation of each reach production is normal reach production <SP reach production <SPSP reach production. <It is set to be higher in the order of full rotation reach production. When the SPSP reach effect is finally executed, the jackpot expectation is set to be higher when the SP SP reach effect is passed than when the SP reach effect is not performed.

In the SP reach effect / SPSP reach effect, for example, an animation image or a live-action image of a character related to a predetermined motif is used, and the result suggests that the final success (win) or failure (defeat) is achieved (success). A series of story productions are performed that progresses toward victory) production or failure (defeat).

For example, as story production performed in SP / SPSP reach production, there are battle production, mission production, and the like. The main production of the battle is an animation in which a friendly character (hereinafter referred to as a friendly character) and an enemy character (hereinafter referred to as an enemy character) confront each other. On the other hand, it is a series of story productions that is a defeat production that suggests a battle defeat by defeating an ally character by an enemy character when it is lost.

In the battle production, for example, the expectation of battle victory is set according to the number of ally characters who confront the enemy character, and the order of "1 person" <"2 people" <"3 people" <"4 people", that is, It is set so that the expectation of battle victory increases as the number of ally characters increases. In addition, when there are four ally characters, it is set to always win the battle. In addition, from the start of the battle to the victory or defeat of the battle, as the number of ally characters gradually increases, the battle production and allies in the changing stage develop (chance up) in the direction of winning the battle. One of the battle productions in the non-change stage where the number of characters does not increase is performed.

For example, the mission production is mainly an animation in which one or more characters challenge a mission to find a treasure, and while it is a success production that suggests a successful mission to find a treasure at the time of a big hit, it cannot find a treasure when it is lost. It is a series of story productions that are failure productions that suggest mission failure.

In the mission production, for example, the number of characters searching for treasure is in the order of "1" <"2" <"3" <"4", that is, as the number of characters increases, the mission succeeds. It is set to have high expectations. In addition, when there are four people, it is set so that the mission will always be successful. Also, from the start of the mission to the success or failure of the mission, as the number of characters increases gradually, the possibility of success of the mission increases (chance increases). And one of the mission productions in the non-change stage where the number of characters does not increase is performed.

In the battle effect (or mission effect), the highlight color maintenance effect rotates in a state where many beads like jewels are continuously connected like a chain when the main effect is performed by the character. In addition to displaying the chain effect image, the display color of the chain effect image is used to highlight the expectation of winning a big hit that strongly appeals to the player's vision. Specifically, in the first image display device 70, when a battle between an ally character and an enemy character is being performed in the central area of the display unit, a chain of predetermined display colors is used in the display area near the left and right outer edges of the display unit. The effect image is highlighted.

As shown in FIG. 56, the display color of the chain effect image is displayed as one of "blue", "green", "red", and "rainbow", and each of the four display colors corresponds to the number of characters appearing. It is attached. Specifically, when the number of ally characters who battle with the enemy character is "1 person", the blue chain effect image is displayed, and when it is "2 people", the green chain effect image is displayed, and "3 people". When "", a red chain effect image is displayed, and when "4 people", a rainbow-colored chain effect image is displayed, and the display color corresponding to the number of ally characters is maintained during the battle. It continues to be displayed in the state of.

The jackpot winning expectation related to the display color of the chain effect image is "blue" <"green" <"red" on the premise that the jackpot winning expectation increases as the number of ally characters increases (increases). The expectation of winning a big hit is high in the order of "rainbow", and the display color of the chain effect image is "blue" → "green" → "red" → "rainbow" as the number of ally characters increases one by one. It changes in the order of. The rainbow-colored chain effect image suggests that it is confirmed (rich) that the 16R probability variation jackpot has been won.

57 and 58 are diagrams showing an example of a battle effect pattern determination table to be referred to when determining a battle effect pattern when a battle effect is performed by the SP reach effect and the SPSP reach effect. The battle effect pattern determination table is associated with the jackpot determination result, the type of reach effect (SP reach effect / SPSP reach effect), the random value for determining the battle effect pattern, and the battle effect pattern, and the selection rate shown in FIG. 57. A random value for determining the battle effect pattern is assigned so as to be (%). For reference, the effect configuration (effect mode) of each reach effect pattern is described in the rightmost column. Based on the jackpot determination result, the type of reach effect, and the acquired random value for determining the battle effect pattern, one battle effect pattern is determined from a plurality of types of battle effect patterns.

As shown in FIG. 57, the battle effect patterns 1 to 7 corresponding to the lost SP reach effect and the SPSP reach effect are defeat effects in which one or more ally characters are defeated in a battle confrontation with an enemy character, and are promoted. It is a production that suggests that the production and the revival production will not be performed. In the battle production patterns 1 to 7, the expectation of winning a big hit differs depending on the number of ally characters. The types of ally characters and enemy characters are different between the battle effect patterns 1 to 4 executed by the lost SP reach effect and the battle effect patterns 5 to 7 executed by the lost SP SP reach effect.

For example, in the battle production pattern 1 corresponding to the loss SP reach production, after one ally character and the enemy character attack each other, one ally character attacks the enemy character with three types of techniques (“kick”). , "Punch", "Special Move"), but it is a defeat production that is finally defeated.

For example, in the battle production pattern 7 corresponding to the loss SPSP reach production, after one ally character and the enemy character attack each other, the number of ally characters increases by one to two through a predetermined transition production. After the two ally characters and the enemy character attack each other, the number of ally characters increases to one and becomes three via the transition effect, and the three ally characters attack the enemy character. It is a defeat production that attacks with any of the three types of techniques but is finally defeated.

Here, the transition production is a production that suggests that the production has a higher degree of victory (success) expectation than the production being performed (development), and is performed in a production mode different from the production mode of the battle production. For example, when a friendly character and an enemy character are attacking each other, the entire display unit suddenly blacks out (or whites out).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 58, the battle effect patterns 11 to 22 corresponding to the jackpot SP reach effect and the SPSP reach effect are victory effects in which a plurality of ally characters win the battle confrontation with the enemy character, and are promoted. It is a production that suggests that a production and a revival production will be performed. In the battle production patterns 11 to 22, the expectation of winning a big hit differs depending on the number of ally characters. The types of ally characters and enemy characters are different between the battle effect patterns 11 to 17 executed by the jackpot SP reach effect and the battle effect patterns 18 to 22 executed by the jackpot SPSP reach effect.

For example, in the battle production pattern 11 corresponding to the jackpot SP reach production, after one ally character and the enemy character attack each other, the number of ally characters increases by one to two through the transition production. This is a victory production in which two ally characters attack an enemy character with one of three types of techniques and finally win.

For example, in the battle production pattern 20 corresponding to the jackpot SPSP reach production, after one ally character and the enemy character attack each other, the number of ally characters increases by one to two through the transition production. After the two ally characters and the enemy character attack each other, the number of ally characters increases by 2 to 4 via the transition effect, and 4 ally characters attack the enemy character. It is a victory production that attacks with any of the three types of techniques and finally wins.

The chain effect image is displayed at the start of the battle, and the display color of the chain effect image changes when the number of ally characters increases (triggered by the transition effect). As a mode of changing the display color of the chain effect image, the jackpot winning expectation is changed to the display color one step higher than the display color being displayed according to the number of ally characters after the transition effect ("blue"). → "Green", "Green" → "Red", "Red" → "Rainbow": 1UP), and the jackpot winning expectation changes to the display color two levels higher than the display color being displayed () "Blue"-> "red", "green"-> "rainbow": 2UP) in some cases. When the display color of the chain effect changes, the jackpot winning expectation does not change to the display color one or a plurality of steps lower than the display color being displayed.

Specifically, when the battle effect of the battle effect pattern 1 is performed, the blue chain effect continues to be displayed because the number of ally characters does not increase as one person, that is, the display color of the chain effect does not change. On the other hand, when the battle production of battle production pattern 4 is performed, the display color of the chain effect image is "blue" → "green" → "red" as the number of ally characters increases one by one after the battle starts. It changes step by step in the order of. When the battle production of battle production pattern 3 is performed, the display color of the chain effect image will be changed from "blue" to "red" in two stages because the number of people will increase by 2 from one ally character at once after the battle starts. Change.

In the battle production corresponding to the loss SP reach production, the ratio of selecting the battle production pattern 1 in which the number of ally characters does not increase after the start of the battle is set higher than the ratio of selecting the battle production patterns 2 to 4. , The display color of the chain effect image is hard to change. On the other hand, in the battle production corresponding to the loss SPSP reach production, the display color of the chain effect image is likely to change because the number of ally characters increases even if any of the battle production patterns 5 to 7 is selected after the battle starts. I can say.

As shown in FIG. 57, in the battle production corresponding to the lost SP reach effect and the SPSP reach effect, the number of ally characters does not increase to four, so after the battle starts, the display color of the chain effect image is ". It doesn't change until "rainbow".

Although not shown, when the mission effect is performed by the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect, the display color corresponding to the number of characters increased due to the transition effect after the start of the mission is the same as the battle effect. It is configured to change to a chain effect image.

In the SP reach production and the SPSP reach production, it is possible to execute a dialogue notice that suggests the expectation of winning a big hit when the battle production is being performed, and when the dialogue notice is given, the expectation of victory is high (big hit winning). It is possible to execute a chance-up notice that suggests that it will develop into a production (high expectations). Whether or not the dialogue notice is executed is determined by lottery based on the variable effect pattern to be executed.

As shown in FIG. 59, in the dialogue notice determination table, the jackpot determination result, the final reach type of the determined variation effect pattern, the selection rate (%) of each dialogue advance notice pattern, and the determined dialogue notice are displayed. The pattern is associated with whether or not the dialogue notice is executed, and for reference, the effect configuration (effect mode) when the dialogue notice is executed is described in the rightmost column.

The jackpot winning expectation related to the dialogue notice pattern is set to increase in the order of dialogue notice pattern 1 <line notice pattern 2 <line notice pattern 3 <line notice pattern 4. In the case of a battle effect in which the jackpot determination result is lost, the rate at which the dialogue notice pattern 1 is selected is set higher than the proportion at which the dialogue notice patterns 2 to 4 are selected, while the jackpot determination result is In the case of a battle effect that is a big hit, the ratio at which the dialogue notice pattern 3 is selected is set higher than the ratio at which the dialogue notice patterns 1, 2, and 4 are selected. In addition, in the dialogue notice pattern 0, the dialogue that does not indicate the jackpot winning expectation degree is displayed.

Here, the "low expectation line" in the line image item of the line notice judgment table is a line that makes you expect that you may win a big hit (for example, "maybe a chance !?", "maybe something !?" ”, Etc.) is displayed, and“ high expectation dialogue ”is a dialogue that expects a high probability of winning a big hit (for example,“ chance !! ”,“ intense heat !! ”, etc.). Indicates that it will be displayed.

The jackpot winning expectation indicated by each line type is set so as to increase in the order of low expectation line <high expectation line. In addition, the expectation of winning a big hit of a plurality of lines provided for each line type is different, and one line is determined by lottery from the plurality of lines.

The display color (character color) of each line is displayed in any of "black", "blue", "red", and "gold". The jackpot winning expectation indicated by the display color is set to increase in the order of "black" <"blue" <"red" <"gold". Therefore, even if the contents are the same (for example, red "chance !!" and golden "chance !!"), the expectation of winning a big hit differs depending on the character color. It should be noted that the golden high-expectation dialogue is not displayed in the lost SP reach effect and the SPSP reach effect. That is, when the golden high expectation line is displayed, it is suggested that the jackpot winning is rich.

As shown in FIG. 60, in the chance-up notice execution determination table, the execution rate (%) of the chance-up notice is associated with the dialogue notice patterns 1 to 3, and when the high expectation dialogue is performed, the dialogue is high. , The execution rate is set higher than when the normal dialogue or the low expectation dialogue is performed.

Further, the chance-up notice is set to have a higher execution rate in the case of the jackpot SP reach effect and the SPSP reach effect than in the case of the lost SP reach effect and the SPSP reach effect. Also, in the case of a jackpot SPSP reach production, when a golden high-expectation line is displayed, a chance-up notice is always given.

In the chance-up notice, the movable effect member 73 in the standby position moves to the advance position with the light emission of a predetermined color, and the character image of "CHANCE UP" is performed with the start of the operation of the movable effect member 73. Is displayed. The character image of "CHANGE UP" is displayed in any of the display colors (character colors) of "blue", "green", "red", and "rainbow", and the jackpot winning expectation indicated by the display color is "red". "<" Green "<" Red "<" Rainbow "is set to increase in this order. Further, the movable effect member 73 can emit light in any color of "blue", "green", "red", and "rainbow", and when it emits light, it emits light in the same color as the display color of the character image. do.

In the case of the loss judgment result, the selection rate of "blue" is set higher than the jackpot judgment result, while in the case of the jackpot judgment result, the selection rate of "red" is higher than the loss judgment result. It is set high. Further, "rainbow" is set so as to be selected in the case of a jackpot determination result and not selected in the case of a loss determination result.

In this way, when a battle effect or a mission effect is performed during the SP reach effect or SPSP reach effect, the emphasized display color maintenance effect is performed by the chain effect image, and when the number of characters increases due to the transition effect, the chain is used. Since the display color of the effect image changes to a display color that suggests that the expectation of winning a big hit is one or two steps higher than the display color being displayed, it is visually visible that the possibility of winning a big hit increases. It is possible to further raise the player's attention to the reach production and improve the interest of the game by effectively inciting the player's expectation for the big hit winning.

In addition, when a battle production or a mission production is being performed, a dialogue notice or a chance-up notice is given, and the content of the dialogue image of the dialogue notice, the display color of the dialogue image, the character movement production and the character in the chance-up notice. Depending on the display color of the image, it is possible to raise the expectation of the player to win the big hit.

Next, the highlight color maintenance effect corresponding to the main effect performed in the look-ahead notice will be described.
The pre-reading notice is a notice that expects that there is a possibility of winning a big hit over one or more variable effects corresponding to the special figure variable display before the variable effect corresponding to the special figure variable display to be announced is started. It is a production.

The look-ahead notice is when the special figure determination information is stored (held storage) in the storage unit, the conditions for executing the look-ahead notice are satisfied, and the pre-reading notice is won by a lottery for determining whether or not the look-ahead notice is executed. , The latest special figure determination information stored in the storage unit is used as a look-ahead target. As a condition for executing the look-ahead notice, for example, two or more special figure determination information including the look-ahead target is stored in the storage unit, and is stored before the special figure determination information set as the look-ahead target 1. Alternatively, it is set that the special figure determination information of the big hit is not stored in the plurality of special figure determination information.

When the condition for executing the look-ahead notice is satisfied, whether or not the look-ahead notice is executed is determined (determined) by using the look-ahead notice execution determination table shown in FIG. The look-ahead advance notice execution determination table is a determination value to be compared with the look-ahead advance notice determination random number value acquired from the advance notice determination random number (0 to 99) at the time of the advance determination process, and determines whether or not the look-ahead advance notice is executed. A determination value for this is pre-allocated for each reserved storage number.

As shown in FIG. 61, the execution rate of the look-ahead notice varies depending on the number of reserved storages. Specifically, when the number of reserved storages is 4, the execution rate is 60% when the fourth reserved special figure determination information is targeted for pre-reading, and when the number of reserved storages is 3. When the execution rate is 30% and the number of reserved special figures is 2 when the third reserved special figure determination information is to be read ahead, the second reserved special figure determination information is read ahead. When targeting, the execution rate is set to 3%. That is, it is set so that the execution rate of the pre-reading notice increases as the number of reserved storages of the special figure determination information increases. By performing the effect of the look-ahead notice over a long period of time, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation and excitement of the big hit by the time the pattern change effect of the look-ahead target is performed.

The look-ahead notice includes a continuous notice effect and a hold icon change notice effect. As a continuous advance notice effect, a look-ahead zone effect in which a zone effect is performed in one or a plurality of variable effects including a variable effect of a look-ahead target, and a movable effect member 73 over one or a plurality of variable effects including a variable effect of a look-ahead target. A chance to stop and display three production symbols in an array with a predetermined regularity over one or more loss fluctuation production before the continuous step-up notice production that performs step-by-step effect production and the fluctuation production of the look-ahead target. It is possible to execute an effect continuous advance notice effect that changes the display color of the effect image stepwise over one or a plurality of loss variation effects including the eye notice effect and the variation effect of the look-ahead target.

When the effect continuous advance notice effect is executed as the look-ahead notice, the display unit on the first image display device 70 spans a plurality of lost change change effect execution periods (predetermined number of times change zone) until the change effect of the look-ahead target is performed. A specific character is displayed in the center area of the character, and a ring-shaped effect image that surrounds the character is displayed in a predetermined area of a part of the display area in the outer edge direction from the character display area. Each time the effect image is displayed, the display color changes step by step to highlight the player's visual perception of the jackpot winning expectation.

As shown in FIG. 62 (1), the display color of the effect image displayed in the effect continuous advance notice effect is any of "blue", "yellow", "green", "red", and "rainbow". The jackpot winning expectation indicated by the display color is set to increase in the order of "blue" <"yellow" <"green" <"red" <"rainbow". The "rainbow" is displayed when the pre-reading target variation effect is a jackpot variation effect.

In the effect continuous advance notice effect, the display color of the effect image can be changed based on a preset change scenario. There are multiple change scenario determination tables for determining change scenarios. The plurality of change scenario determination tables are the number of special figure determination information stored in the storage unit (number of reserved storages), the pre-judgment result of the special figure determination information to be read ahead, and the variation effect executed by the variation effect of the look-ahead target. They are classified according to the pattern.

Each change scenario determination table is associated with a hold to be read ahead, a variation effect pattern of the variation effect of the look-ahead target, a random value for scenario determination, and a scenario so as to have a predetermined selection rate (%). Random values for scenario determination are assigned.

For example, when the hold to be read ahead is the fourth, the change scenario determination table shown in FIG. 62 (2) is referred to, and the scenario determination random value is assigned so as to have the selectivity (%) shown in FIG. It has been. For reference, the production configuration (production mode) of each scenario is described in the rightmost column.

When the pre-judgment result and the variation effect of the look-ahead target are the variation effect patterns of loss, one of the scenarios 1 and 2 is selected, and the scenario 2 in which the final change mode of the display color of the effect image is "green" is The rate of selection is set higher than that of scenario 1 in which the final change mode is "red". On the other hand, in the case of the jackpot variation effect pattern, scenario 3 is scenario 3 in which one of scenarios 3, 4 and 5 is selected, the display color of the effect image is increased step by step, and the final change mode is red. The ratio of selection is set higher than 5.

It is possible to raise the expectation of the player to win the jackpot over the period until the change of the look-ahead target is performed due to the change in the display color of the effect image, and it is possible to improve the interest of the look-ahead notice effect. It will be possible.

Next, a repetitive emphasis effect corresponding to the main effect performed in the result notification effect will be described.
The result notification effect is given to the player before the fixed stop display (before the special symbol is stopped and displayed by the jackpot symbol) in the combination display mode indicating that the three effect symbols are the jackpot in the jackpot variation effect. Notify the confirmation of the jackpot winning.

The main effects performed in the result notification effect are the character movement effect, the sound effect, and the lamp effect.
The accessory movement effect is, for example, a movable effect of a standby position above the first image display device 70 display unit before the fixed stop display is performed in a combination display mode indicating that the three effect symbols are big hits. The member 73 moves to an advance position that covers at least a part of the front side of the display unit (screen) with light emission of a predetermined color, and then performs a series of movement operations to return to the standby position.

For the sound effect, the sound output device 9 outputs a definite sound dedicated to the jackpot winning (BGM or SE dedicated to the jackpot winning) for a predetermined time.
In the lamp effect, the lamps of the panel lighting device 74 and / or the frame lighting device 10 are lit for a predetermined time in a lighting pattern dedicated to the jackpot winning, which is different from the normal lighting pattern. Further, as the main effect, only one of the character motion effect, the sound effect, and the lamp effect may be performed, or the character motion effect and the sound effect, the character motion effect and the lamp effect, Alternatively, the accessory operation effect, the sound effect, and the lamp effect may be performed in parallel.

As shown in FIG. 63, in the repetitive emphasis effect corresponding to the main effect (feature motion effect, sound effect, lamp effect), in the first image display device 70, the color of the glow emitted radially to the entire display unit is emitted. By a rainbow flash image of a light emitting mode that repeatedly displays changes that change continuously and instantaneously in the order of "red" → "orange" → "yellow" → "green" → "blue" → "indigo" → "purple" Highlighting is done.

Specifically, when the accessory movement effect is performed, a rainbow flash image is displayed as the operation of the movable effect member 73 in the standby position moves to the advance position with light emission of a predetermined color, and the rainbow flash image is displayed. , The movable effect member 73 is continuously displayed until it returns to the standby position. In the result notification effect, when the repeat emphasis effect is performed, the synergistic effect of the character movement effect and the repeat emphasis effect can give a strong impact to the player as compared with the case where the repeat emphasis effect is not performed. It can produce a visually appealing effect.

Further, when the sound effect is performed, the rainbow flash image is displayed from the voice output device 9 with the start of the output of the jackpot confirmed sound, and the sound effect is continuously performed until the output of the jackpot confirmed sound is completed. Further, when the lamp effect is performed, a rainbow flash image is displayed when the light emitters of the lamps of the panel lighting device 74 and / or the frame lighting device 10 start lighting in the lighting pattern dedicated to the jackpot, and the lighting ends. It will continue until it is done.

The display mode of the flash image may be different depending on the type of the main effect. For example, a rainbow flash image may be displayed in the character motion effect, a gold flash image may be displayed in the sound effect, and a jewel beetle flash image may be displayed in the lamp effect.

Next, a repetitive emphasis effect corresponding to the main effect performed in the jackpot effect will be described.
The jackpot effect is a notification effect that notifies that the jackpot type and the number of rounds of the jackpot game have been determined after the jackpot symbol has been confirmed and stopped displayed in the variable effect. As the main effect of this jackpot effect, for example, "SUPER BONUS" indicating that the 16R probability variation jackpot has been confirmed, "BIG BONUS" indicating that the 10R probability variation jackpot has been confirmed, and 5R are displayed on the display unit of the first image display device 70. Normally, a character image such as "BONUS" indicating that the jackpot has been confirmed is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 64, in the repetitive emphasis effect corresponding to the main effect, when a character image showing confirmation information of the type of jackpot is displayed on the display unit in the first image display device 70, from behind the character image. Highlighting is performed by a backlit flash image (confirmed flash image) of a light emitting mode in which a change display in which the display color of a ring having light stripes spreading radially changes as if an umbrella is opened is repeatedly performed. The halo flash image is continuously displayed while the character image is displayed. Further, a specific voice or notification sound is output from the voice output device 9 in accordance with the display of the backlit flash image, and the light emitters of the lamps of the panel lighting device 74 and / or the frame lighting device 10 are lit and blinked. do.

The halo flash image has a different emission display mode depending on the content of the confirmation information of the type of jackpot indicated by the character image. Specifically, when the character image of "SUPER BONUS" is displayed, the halo flash A image is displayed from behind the character image, and the emission mode of the halo flash A image is radially from the back of the character image. The change display of the pattern in which the ring with the spreading halo alternates between red and yellow and changes momentarily is repeated.

When the character image of "BIG BONUS" is displayed, the back light flash B image is displayed from behind the character image, and the light emission mode of the back light flash B image has streaks extending radially from the back of the character image. The change display of the pattern in which the ring changes momentarily alternately in red and blue is repeatedly performed.

When the character image of "BONUS" is displayed, the back light flash C image is displayed from behind the character image, and the light emission mode of the back light flash C image is a ring with streaks extending radially from the back of the character image. The change display of the pattern that changes momentarily alternately between red and green is repeated.

In the jackpot effect, when the repetitive emphasis effect is performed, the visual highlighting that emphasizes the definite information shown by the character image has an impact that attracts the player's attention, as compared with the case where the repetitive emphasis effect is not performed. It is possible to produce a directing effect that appeals to the player, and it is possible to amplify the joy of winning the jackpot of the player and enhance the feeling of exhilaration to the climax.

Next, a repetitive emphasis effect corresponding to the main effect performed in the mode notification effect will be described.
The mode notification effect is a notification effect that notifies the type of effect mode set according to the gaming state. In the mode notification effect, as the main effect, a character image display indicating the type of the effect mode set according to the gaming state is performed. For example, on the display unit of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display), mode confirmation information by character images such as "○○ RUSH rush" and "○○ mode rush" is displayed. For example, when the game state after the jackpot game is set to the probability change game state, the character image of "Zan RUSH rush" indicating the probability change mode confirmation is displayed, and when the time reduction game state is set, the time reduction mode confirmation is shown. The text image of "Chance time rush" is displayed.

Here, the effect mode is for notifying the currently set gaming state. Specifically, a normal mode is set to notify that the current gaming state is the normal gaming state in the normal gaming state (non-time saving gaming state), and the current gaming state is probablely changed in the probabilistic gaming state. A probabilistic mode for notifying that the game is in the game state is set, and a time-saving mode for notifying that the current game state is in the time-saving game state is set in the time-saving game state.

In setting the effect mode corresponding to the current game state, for example, the effect image for notifying the current game state is displayed on the first image display device 70 and / or the background to be displayed on the first image display device 70. By making the display mode of the image, the character image, or the effect symbol 70a different from the display mode in the other effect modes, the current gaming state is notified.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65, in the normal mode, stages 1 to 3 are prepared in advance as a plurality of stage effects having different effect modes, and the stages 1 to 3 are the backgrounds displayed on the first image display device 70. The production mode of the image is different. For example, a background image with a spring motif is displayed on stage 1, a background image with a summer motif is displayed on stage 2, and a background image with a winter motif is displayed on stage 3, respectively. Even in the probabilistic mode, a plurality of stage productions with different production modes are prepared.

In the normal mode, for example, every time a predetermined number of symbol fluctuations (for example, 50 times) is reached, the stages are set to be switched in a certain order. For example, stage 1 ⇒ stage 2 ⇒ stage 3 ⇒ stage 1 ... The stage is switched according to the switching order of repeating. Further, as a predetermined switching condition, for example, the normal stage may be switched from the next variable effect according to the stage switching order triggered by the reach loss, or the stage switching order may be triggered by the operation of the effect button 17 by the player. The stage may be switched according to the above.

The display mode of the effect symbol 70a executed in each of the plurality of stages 1 to 3 is different. The effect symbol 70a is identified as an identification unit 70b composed of code information of numbers or characters indicating "1" to "9" or "1" to "9" according to the type of stage corresponding to the gaming state. There are cases where it is composed of a decorative part 70c which is composed of predetermined decorative information (accompanying information) such as a character image and a decorative frame image which are attached to the periphery (nearby) of the part 70b, and a case where it is composed of only the identification part 70b. There is (see FIG. 67 (1)).

Specifically, the display mode of the effect symbol 70a at the stage 1 is the identification part of the numbers "1" to "9" and the animal character image "dog, cat, tiger" displayed corresponding to each number. It is composed of the decoration part of "etc.". The display mode of the effect symbol 70a at the time of stage 2 is composed of an identification unit of "1" to "9" and a decoration unit of a character image related to a predetermined motif. The display mode of the effect symbol 70a at the stage 3 is composed of only the identification portions of "1" to "9". As described above, in the normal mode, the stage 1 and 2 display the highly decorative design effect symbol 70a in which the identification unit and the decorative unit are combined, and the stage 3 display the effect design design consisting of only the identification unit. 70a is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 66, in the repetitive emphasis effect corresponding to the main effect performed in the mode notification effect, when the character image indicating the mode confirmation information is displayed on the first image display device 70, behind the character image. The highlighting is performed by a backlit flash image (confirmed flash image).

Specifically, when the probabilistic mode is set, a ring with streaks that radiate from behind the character image indicating that the probabilistic mode is confirmed toward the outer edge of the display unit changes instantaneously alternately in gold and silver. The highlighting is performed by the halo flash a image of the light emitting mode in which the pattern change display is repeatedly performed, and the halo flash a image is continuously performed while the character image is displayed.

When the time saving mode is set, a change display of a pattern in which a ring with halos radiating from behind the character image indicating the time saving mode confirmation changes instantaneously alternately between blue and green is displayed. The highlighting is performed by the halo flash b image that is repeatedly performed, and the halo flash b image is continuously performed while the character image is displayed.

In the mode notification effect, when the repeat emphasis effect is performed, the impact that attracts the player's attention by performing the highlight display that emphasizes the character image showing the mode confirmation information as compared with the case where the repeat emphasis effect is not performed. It is possible to produce a visually appealing effect, and it is possible for the player to surely grasp the current state of the game.

Next, a specific example of the effect including the display mode of the emphasis effect (highlighted display maintenance effect, repeated emphasis effect) displayed by the first image display device 70 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 67 (1), a normal mode is set corresponding to a normal gaming state, and in stage 1 (background image with a spring motif (not shown)) of the normal mode, the first display units 70B1 to 1 Four first hold icons H11 to H14 are displayed on B4, and the second hold icon is not displayed on the second display units 70D1 to 70D4, and the hold number "4" is displayed in the first hold number display area 70E. Is displayed and the hold number "0" is displayed in the second hold number display area 70F, and the combination display mode "2 (dog) 1 (cat) 6 (tiger) in which the three effect symbols 70a show normal loss. ) ”, And the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in the same combination of“ 216 ”as the identification unit 70b of the effect symbol 70a.

The variable display of the special symbol TZ is continuously performed in a fixed display mode during the period from the start of the variable display of the special symbol to the stop display, and disappears from the screen or is shielded by the movable effect member 73. It is always displayed in a visible state without any damage. The special symbol TZ is composed of the sign information of the numbers "1" to "9". Further, the reserved numbers in the first and second reserved number display areas 70E and 70F are not erased from the screen or shielded by the movable effect member 73 as in the special symbol TZ, and are always visible. Is displayed.

"Dog, cat, tiger" in the decorative part 70c of the three production patterns 70a of "2 (dog) 1 (cat) 6 (tiger)" displayed as a definite stop shakes the head vertically or horizontally (or) When the identification unit 70a makes a minute change such as shining), the next variation effect is started. It should be noted that the minute operation of the decorative portion 70c of the three effect symbols 70a may be performed before the three effect symbols 70a are fixedly stopped and displayed. The minute movement of the decorative portion 70c of the effect symbol 70a is a symbol determination suggestion effect suggesting that the variation effect start suggestion effect suggesting the start of the next variation effect or the symbol combination display mode to be stopped is determined.

Further, as shown in FIG. 67 (2), as the fluctuation starts, the first hold icon H11 displayed on the first display unit 70B1 shifts to the icon display unit 70C and shifts to the icon display unit 70C. The icon TH is displayed, and the reserved number in the first reserved number display area 70E is subtracted from "4" to "3". The mode of the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is scrolling in the vertical direction, but it may be scrolling in the horizontal direction, or it may be switched or rotated (rotated) on the spot. good.

After the start of the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 67 (3), the effect symbol 70a of "2 (dog)" is temporarily stopped in the left side region, and then, as shown in FIG. 67 (4), "2" is placed in the right side region. The effect symbol 70a of "(dog)" is temporarily stopped, and the left and right effect symbols 70a are in a reach state with the same symbol "2 (dog)".

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 67 (5), when the reach state is reached, the left and right effect symbols 70a are separated from each other from the predetermined stop position shown in FIG. 67 (4). After performing the movement effect ME that temporarily stops at the move position moved to, the normal reach effect or the SP / SPSP reach effect is performed. With this movement effect ME, it is possible to expect that there is a possibility of developing into SP / SPSP reach effect.

If the SP / SPSP reach effect does not develop after the movement effect ME, after the normal reach effect that changes the central effect FIG. 70a is performed, as shown in FIG. 68 (6), the effect of "3 (rabbit)" is performed. The symbol 70a is temporarily stopped. At this time, the left and right effect symbols 70a return from the moving position shown in FIG. 67 (5) to the predetermined stop position shown in FIG. 67 (4) and are temporarily stopped. Then, as shown in FIG. 68 (7), the three effect symbols 70a are fixedly stopped and displayed in the combination display mode “2 (dog) 3 (rabbit) 2 (dog)” indicating the reach loss, and the reach loss is achieved. Be notified.

On the other hand, when the SP / SPSP reach effect is developed after the move effect ME, a predetermined transition effect SH is performed via the normal effect as shown in FIG. 68 (8), and the SP / SPSP reach effect is achieved. Develop. As the transition effect SH, it is possible to perform an effect in which the display of the effect symbol 70a becomes faint and disappears by temporarily whitening (whiteout) or blackening (blackout) the entire display unit. .. Further, after the left and right effect symbols 70a are rotated and displayed, they are moved to the display area near the left and right upper ends of the display unit, and the decorative portion 70c is erased. A switching production is performed. Even during the transition effect SH, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, the first reserved number in the first reserved number display area 70E, and the second reserved number in the second reserved number display area 70F continue to be displayed in a visible state.

With the start of the transition effect SH, the hold icon (including the hold icon display area) being displayed is hidden. In this case, the hold icon (including the hold icon display area) is hidden even during the subsequent execution period of the SP / SPSP reach effect. By displaying only the icon (including the icon display area) when the transition effect SH is being performed, the icon changes to the icon on the side with the higher expectation of the jackpot winning, and the jackpot winning is won. It is possible to expect that the SP / SPSP reach effect, which has a high degree of expectation, will be executed. Even during the reach effect, the reserved numbers displayed in the reserved number display areas 70E and 70F continue to be displayed in a visible state.

As shown in FIG. 68 (9), when the SP reach effect is performed, a battle effect is performed as the SP reach effect (not shown), and if this effect fails, the central region is shown in FIG. 68 (10). In addition, after the symbol of "3" is temporarily stopped in a state where the display size is highlighted so as to be larger and more conspicuous than the reduced symbol ZG of "2" on the left and right, FIGS. 68 (6) and 68 (7). As shown in the above, after the three effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in the combination display mode "2 (dog) 3 (rabbit) 2 (dog)" indicating reach loss, a definite stop display is displayed to notify that the loss has occurred. Will be done.

After that, when the "dog, rabbit, dog" of the decorative part 70c of the production pattern 70a of the production pattern 70a of "2 (dog) 3 (rabbit) 2 (dog)" displayed as confirmed stop performs a minute movement, the next fluctuation production starts. Will be done. Further, as shown in FIG. 69 (11), as the fluctuation starts, the first hold icon H11 displayed on the first display unit 70B1 shifts to the icon display unit 70C and shifts to the icon display unit 70C. The icon TH is displayed, and the reserved number in the first reserved number display area 70E is subtracted from "3" to "2".

After a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 69 (12), an operation promotion effect for urging the operation of the effect button is performed. In the operation promotion effect, a bright color button imitating the current effect button 17 and an operation promotion image showing a gauge indicating the operation validity period of the effect button 17 are displayed. Further, the button light emitting LED 17d is turned on and the effect button 17 emits white light.

As shown in FIG. 69 (13), when the effect button 17 is operated, the dialogue display effect is performed, and the dialogue image M0 of the high expectation dialogue "I can expect it" is displayed. Further, the effect button 17 is changed to a vibration state (specific state) by operating the button vibration motor 17c, and the button change effect is performed by outputting a vibration sound (“bull bull”) from the voice output device 9. .. Further, the button light emitting LED 17d is extinguished and the light emission of the effect button 17 is stopped. Even after the operation of the effect button 17 is completed, the dialogue display effect and the button change effect continue. In addition, when the dialogue image of the low expectation dialogue is displayed in the dialogue display effect, the button change effect is not performed.

As shown in FIG. 69 (14), the operation of the button vibration motor 17c and the output of the vibration sound from the voice output device 9 are stopped while the dialogue display effect is continued.

As shown in FIG. 70 (15), the dialogue image is erased after the execution period of the dialogue display effect has elapsed, and as shown in FIG. 70 (16), the effect symbol 70a of "4 (chicken)" is displayed in the left area. Is temporarily stopped, and subsequently, the effect symbol 70a of "5 (koala)" is temporarily stopped in the right area. Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (17), the yellow NEXT symbol 70a1 is temporarily stopped in the central region, and the yellow flame effect FE is displayed in the display region near the left and right outer edges of the display unit 70 to simulate it. Continuous notice will be given. Instead of temporarily stopping the NEXT symbol 70a1, the flame effect FE may be displayed by highlighting only the character symbol of "ream" in a display size larger than the normal display size. ..

The re-variation of the effect symbol 70a is started, and as shown in FIG. 70 (18), the yellow flame effect FE is continuously displayed during the re-variation of the effect symbol 70a of the pseudo 1, and the jackpot winning expectation is increased. A suggestion effect (effect A (see FIG. 54)) suggesting whether or not the pseudo-continuous effect is executed is performed. The suggestion effect is not shown.

After that, as shown in FIG. 71 (19), the effect symbol 70a of "6 (tiger)" is temporarily stopped in the left area, and then the effect symbol 70a of "4 (chicken)" is temporarily stopped in the right area. Then, a predictive effect that predicts that there is a high possibility that the pseudo-continuous effect will be continuously performed is performed.

As shown in FIG. 71 (20), in the predictive effect, an effect display operation in which at least a part of the effect images displayed on the display unit is moved or deformed, that is, a so-called shake vision effect is performed. At the same time, with the start of the shake vision production, the character movement production is performed.

In the accessory movement effect, the period is from the timing when the movable effect member 73 starts moving from the standby position to the advance position to the timing when the movable effect member 73 that has moved to the advance position completes the return to the standby position.

In the shake vision effect, the frame display 70 defining the display area of the display unit is switched from the non-shake state to the shake state, and the rectangular (or square) shape frame display 70 in the non-shake state is the rhombus (or trapezoid) shape frame display 70A. On the display unit 70B other than the diamond-shaped frame display 70A in the display unit, an effect image different from the display mode of the diamond-shaped frame display 70A is displayed. Further, various images of the frame display 70A are displayed in a display mode deformed according to the deformation of the frame display.

Specifically, the frame display 70 in the non-shake state is affected by being transformed into a reduced state compared to the non-shake state, and the effect image of the pseudo continuous notice of the frame display 70A (pseudo variation of the effect symbol, suggestion effect). , Flame effect) and the effect image related to the hold display (the icon TH and the hold icon (including the icon display area and the hold icon display area)) are displayed in a reduced size, and the entire image is deeper on the right side than on the left side. The display unit 70B other than the frame display 70A displays, for example, a lightning flash image of a predetermined color in a light emitting mode such that a lightning strike has fallen. It should be noted that the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the display of the reserved numbers in the reserved number display areas 70E and 70F continue to be displayed in a visible state without the display size being deformed even in the shake state.

In executing the shake vision effect, the frame portion 70A1 at the frame edge of the frame display 70A is in any of the display colors of "blue", "green", and "zebra pattern" based on the jackpot judgment result of the special figure judgment information. The jackpot winning expectation related to the displayed color is set to be higher in the order of "blue" <"green" <"zebra pattern". In the case of a loss judgment result, "blue" is set to be selected at a higher rate than the jackpot judgment result, while in the case of a jackpot judgment result, "green" is set higher than the loss judgment result. , "Zebra pattern" is set to be selected at a high rate.

Further, in executing the shake vision effect, the images of the display unit 70B other than the frame display 70A are the "blue flash image", the "green flash image", and the "rainbow flash image" based on the jackpot determination result of the special figure determination information. , And the jackpot winning expectation for each flash image is set to increase in the order of "blue flash image" <"green flash image" <"rainbow flash image". In the case of the loss judgment result, the ratio of selecting the "blue flash image" is set to be higher than the jackpot judgment result, while in the case of the jackpot judgment result, the loss judgment result is higher than the loss judgment result. The percentage of "green flash images" selected is set to be high. Since the "rainbow flash image" is selected only in the case of the jackpot determination result, it suggests that the jackpot winning has been confirmed.

In this way, it is possible to expect (predict) that there is a high possibility that the pseudo-continuous production will be continuously performed by performing the shake vision production during the pseudo-continuous notice, and further, the shake vision production and the character movement production. Since it is possible to create an impactful and visually appealing effect due to the synergistic effect with, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the pseudo-continuous notice production and improve the interest of the game.

As shown in FIG. 71 (21), when the frame display 70A1 in the shake state is returned to the frame display 70 in the non-shake state, the green NEXT symbol 70a1 is temporarily stopped in the central region and the display color of the flame effect FE is changed. The icon changes from "yellow" to "green", the icon TH changes to the blue character icon TH, and the second generation notification sound is output for 0.5 seconds.

The re-variation of the effect symbol 70a is started, and as shown in FIG. 71 (22), the green flame effect FE is continuously displayed during the re-variation of the effect symbol 70a of the pseudo 2, and the suggestion effect (effect B) is displayed. ) Is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 71 (23), the effect symbol 70a of "4 (chicken)" is temporarily stopped in the left area while the green flame effect FE is continuously displayed. Subsequently, a reach fanning effect suggesting that the reach is established or the reach is not established is performed by inciting whether or not the effect symbol 70a of "4 (chicken)" is temporarily stopped in the right area.

In the reach fanning effect, character C1 appears, and this character C1 makes a kick attack against the effect symbol 70a of "3 (rabbit)" that was temporarily stopped in the right area, and the kick attack causes "3 (rabbit)". ) ”The effect symbol 70a is destroyed, and the effect that the effect symbol 70a of“ 4 (chicken) ”may be temporarily stopped is performed. It should be noted that the flame effect FE may be hidden in order to attract the player's attention to the effect symbol 70a during the reach fanning effect. This reach fanning effect makes it possible to raise the player's expectation as to whether or not the player is in the reach state.

In the reach fanning effect, if the effect symbol 70a of "3 (rabbit)" is not destroyed and is temporarily stopped as it is, as shown in FIG. 72 (24), it is a failure effect suggesting that the reach is not established. Is notified, the green flame effect FE is erased, and the pseudo continuous notice ends.

When the failure effect occurs, as shown in FIG. 72 (25), after the effect symbol 70a of "3 (rabbit)" is temporarily stopped in the central region, as shown in FIG. 72 (26), the three effect symbols 70a Is displayed as a fixed stop display in the combination display mode "4 (chicken) 3 (rabbit) 3 (rabbit)" indicating normal loss, and the special symbol TZ is stopped by the same combination of "433" as the identification unit 70b of the effect symbol 70a. It is displayed and the blue character icon TH of the icon display area 70C is erased.

After that, when the "chicken, rabbit, rabbit" of the decorative part 70c of the production pattern 70a of the production pattern 70a of "4 (chicken) 3 (rabbit) 3 (rabbit)" displayed as confirmed stop performs a minute movement, the next fluctuation production starts. Will be done. Further, as shown in FIG. 72 (27), as the fluctuation starts, the first hold icon H11 displayed on the first display unit 70B1 shifts to the icon display unit 70C and shifts to the icon display unit 70C. The icon TH is displayed, and the reserved number in the first reserved number display area 70E is subtracted from "2" to "1".

On the other hand, in the reach fanning effect, the effect symbol 70a of "3 (rabbit)" is finally destroyed, and as shown in FIG. 72 (28), the effect symbol 70a of "4 (chicken)" is provisionally. When it is stopped and it is notified that it is a success effect suggesting the establishment of reach, the green flame effect FE is erased, the pseudo continuous notice ends, and the reach effect is performed.

When it becomes a successful production, as shown in FIG. 72 (29), the normal reach production is performed after the left and right “4 (chicken)” production symbols 70a perform the movement production ME, and as shown in FIG. 72 (30). , A predetermined transition effect SH is performed, and as shown in FIG. 72 (31), the temporarily stopped left and right “4 (chicken)” effect symbols 70a move to the display area near the left and right upper ends and are displayed. It develops into SP or SPSP reach effect in the state where only the identification part of "4" whose size is reduced is changed and displayed in the reduced symbol ZG.

As shown in FIG. 73 (32), when the SPSP reach effect is developed, the battle effect is performed. One ally character C2 and the enemy character T start a battle in the display area including the central area, and the blue chain effect CE is displayed in the display area near the left and right outer edges of the display unit 70.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (33), while the blue chain effect CE is continuously displayed, the ally character C2 makes a punch attack against the enemy character T to hunt down the enemy character T. When the situation is reversed at the end of the battle and the ally character C2 is defeated by the enemy character T, as shown in FIG. 73 (34), it is notified that the ally character C2 is a defeat effect suggesting that the ally character C2 has been defeated in the battle. At the same time, the chain effect CE is erased, and three reduced symbols ZG are temporarily stopped in the lower right corner in the combination display mode “454” indicating reach loss.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (35), after the three effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in the combination display mode “4 (chicken) 5 (koala) 4 (chicken)” showing reach loss, FIG. 73 (36). ), The special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in the same combination of "454" as the identification unit 70b of the effect symbol 70a, and the blue character icon TH of the icon display area 70C is erased. ..

On the other hand, when the ally character C2 and the enemy character T are in a battle with the blue chain effect CE continuously displayed, the display color is blue as shown in FIG. 73 (37). When the line M1 of "Chance !!" is displayed, as shown in FIG. 73 (38), the movable effect member 37 in the standby position moves to the advance position with rainbow-colored light emission, and the silver display color is displayed. The backlit flash GF is displayed from behind the character image M2 and the character image M2 of "CHANCE UP", and it is suggested that the production is highly expected to win a big hit. At this time, the chain effect CE is hidden in order to draw the player's attention to the character image.

After that, as shown in FIG. 73 (39), the number of ally characters became two, and the character image M3 of "joint battle" indicating that the number of ally characters became two was displayed, and further, the chain. Effect CE changes from "blue" to "green". As a result, the player can surely recognize that the battle production will develop into a production with a high expectation of winning a big hit (winning production), and the expectation for winning a big hit will increase.

After that, as shown in FIG. 74 (40), the two ally characters C2 and C3 and the enemy character T battle with each other while the green chain effect CE is continuously displayed, and "I'm going! When the line M4 of "!" Is displayed and the ally characters C2 and C3 are trying to hunt down the enemy character T by performing the final attack technique for defeating the enemy character T, the decision valid period of the decision effect occurs. A sign effect is performed that predicts (expects) that there is a possibility of doing so. Here, the deciding effect is an operation effect for notifying the jackpot determination result based on the operation of the effect button 17 during the deciding valid period that occurs during the variable effect.

As shown in FIG. 74 (41), in the sign effect, the sign image KG is composed of a plurality of arcuate effects gathering toward the center of the central region and a promotion sign display consisting of three dark-colored buttons imitating the effect button 17. Is displayed, and the three dark buttons gradually move to the center of the central area along the arc-shaped effect. The chain effect CE is hidden when the sign effect is being performed.

Then, at the timing before the predetermined time for which the determined valid period is set, the first button change effect is started. Specifically, when the button drive motor is operated, the effect button 17 begins to change to a protruding state (specific state).

Next, when the change of the effect button 17 to the protruding state (specific state) is completed, the determined valid period is set, and as shown in FIG. 74 (42), the dark color button formed in the center of the central region is formed. Along with changing to a bright color button imitating the current effect button 17, a character image prompting the operation of the effect button 17 of the red display color "press !!" and a gauge indicating the operation validity period of the effect button 17 are shown. The operation promotion image SG is displayed (operation promotion effect), the button light emitting LED is lit, and the effect button 17 emits red light (light emission effect). When the operation promotion effect is being performed, the chain effect CE is hidden.

Then, when the effect button 17 in the protruding state is operated, the loss determination effect is started as shown in FIG. 75 (43). Specifically, the failure image HG suggesting that the image is lost is displayed without the operation of the movable effect member 73. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 75 (44), it is suggested that the defeat effect suggests that the ally characters C2 and C3 have been defeated by the enemy character T, and the combination of the three reduced symbols ZG showing the reach loss. It is temporarily stopped in the display mode "454".

As shown in FIG. 75 (45), after being temporarily stopped in the combination display mode “4 (chicken) 5 (koala) 4 (chicken)” in which the three effect symbols 70a show reach loss, it is shown in FIG. 75 (46). As a fixed stop display, the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in the same combination of "454" as the identification unit 70b of the effect symbol 70a, the blue character icon TH of the icon display area 70C is erased, and the icon is lost. You will be notified that there is.

After that, when the "chicken, koala, chicken" of the decorative part 70c of the effect pattern 70a of the effect pattern 70a of "4 (chicken) 5 (koala) 4 (chicken)" displayed as confirmed stop performs a minute movement, the next variation effect starts. Will be done. Further, as shown in FIG. 74 (43), as the fluctuation starts, the first hold icon H11 displayed on the first display unit 70B1 shifts to the icon display unit 70C and shifts to the icon display unit 70C. The icon TH is displayed, and the reserved number in the first reserved number display area 70E is subtracted from "2" to "1".

On the other hand, after being notified in FIG. 75 (44) that the battle effect is a defeat effect, as shown in FIG. 76 (51), the symbol 70b (identification unit) of "5" is left and right in the central region. After being temporarily stopped in a state where the display size is enlarged and emphasized so as to be conspicuously larger than the reduced symbol ZG of "4", as shown in FIG. 76 (52), the character image M5 of the predetermined color "NT Challenge". Is displayed, and the after-light flash CF in which the flame burning bright red spreads radially from behind the character image M5 is displayed, and the character image M5 of "NT Challenge" is highlighted to notify that the challenge effect is performed. Will be done.

When the character image M5 of "NT Challenge" of the predetermined display color is displayed, the icon TH and the hold icon (including the icon display area and the hold icon display area) are hidden, while the first and first. 2 The reserved number display areas 70E and 70F continue to be displayed.

The character image M5 of "NT Challenge" is displayed in any of "blue", "red", and "rainbow" display colors, and the challenge success expectation indicated by the display colors is "blue" <"red" <". It is set to be higher in the order of "rainbow". When a rainbow-colored text image is displayed, it is suggested that the success of the challenge is rich (or confirmed), that is, winning the resurrection jackpot is rich (or confirmed), while the blue text image. Is displayed, it suggests that the chances of success in the challenge are low.

The challenge effect is a revival effect that is expected to be revived as a big hit after the reach is lost. For example, a meter change effect is performed by a level meter display accompanying a continuous pressing operation of the effect button 17. In this case, if the level value of the level meter reaches MAX by continuous pressing during the operation valid period, the challenge is successful and the revival jackpot is achieved, but if it does not reach MAX, the challenge fails. It becomes a loss. It is possible to perform an impactful production that may turn the disappointment of the player's reach loss into joy.

When the challenge is successful, as shown in FIG. 76 (53), the character image M6 of "challenge success" is displayed, and the halo flash EF is displayed from behind the character image M6, and the character "challenge success" is displayed. Image M6 is highlighted. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 76 (54), the movable effect member 73 in the standby position moves to the advance position with rainbow-colored light emission, and the rainbow flash AF is displayed with the start of this accessory operation. You will be notified that you have won a big hit (result notification effect). At this time, the three reduced symbols ZG are temporarily stopped in the combination display mode "444" of the same even-numbered symbols that normally indicate a big hit. Further, the blue character icon TH (including the icon display area 70C) is hidden.

Then, as shown in FIG. 76 (55), the character image M7 of "BONUS" is displayed, the halo flash EF is displayed from behind the character image M7, and the character image M7 of "BONUS" is highlighted. Will be done. In addition, the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in a combination display mode indicating a normal jackpot of "444".

On the other hand, if the challenge fails, as shown in FIG. 76 (56), the left and right “4” reduced symbols ZG return to the “4 (chicken)” production symbol 70a, respectively, and “5 (5)” in the central region. After the effect symbol 70a of "Koala)" is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. 76 (57), the three effect symbols 70a are in the combination display mode "4 (chicken) 5 (koala) 4 (chicken)" of reach loss. Along with the fixed stop display, the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in the same combination of "454" as the identification unit 70b of the effect symbol 70a, and the blue character icon TH of the icon display area 70C is erased.

After that, when the "chicken, koala, chicken" of the decorative part 70c of the effect pattern 70a of the effect pattern 70a of "4 (chicken) 5 (koala) 4 (chicken)" displayed as confirmed stop performs a minute movement, the next variation effect starts. Will be done. Further, as shown in FIG. 76 (58), as the fluctuation starts, the first hold icon H11 displayed on the first display unit 70B1 shifts to the icon display unit 70C and shifts to the icon display unit 70C. The icon TH is displayed, and the reserved number in the first reserved number display area 70E is subtracted from "2" to "1".

On the other hand, when the effect button 17 in the protruding state is operated in FIG. 74 (42), as shown in FIG. 77 (61-1), the movable effect member 73 in the standby position moves to the advance position with rainbow-colored light emission. Along with the start of the movement of the character, a jackpot determination effect is performed in which the rainbow flash AF is displayed on the entire display unit with the start of the character movement, and the combination display mode "444" in which the three reduced symbols ZG indicate the normal jackpot. The blue character icon TH (including the icon display area) is hidden.

Further, after the effect button 17 in the protruding state is operated, the effect button 17 operated by the operation of the button vibration motor changes to the vibration state (specific state), and the vibration sound is output from the voice output device 9. By doing so, the second button change effect (operation effect) is performed. Further, the button light emitting effect is performed by changing the light emitting color of the button light emitting LED 17d and causing the effect button 17 to emit light in rainbow color.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (61-2), when a predetermined time elapses after the effect button 17 is operated, the operation of the effect button 17 ends. Even if the operation of the effect button 17 is completed, the jackpot determination effect continues.

Then, as shown in FIG. 77 (61-3), the second button change effect and the button light emission effect end with the start of the return operation of the movable effect member 73 to the standby position. Specifically, the operation of the button vibration motor 17c and the output of the vibration sound from the voice output device 9 are stopped, the button light emitting LED is extinguished, and the light emission of the effect button 17 is stopped.

Next, when the return of the movable effect member 73 to the standby position is completed and the jackpot determination effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 77 (62), the victory confirmation effect indicating that the ally character C2 has won the enemy character T. (Display of winning image) is performed. At this time, the temporary stop state of the reduced symbol ZG of "444" is continuously displayed, and the blue character icon TH (including the icon display area 70C) remains hidden.

After the victory confirmation effect, as shown in FIG. 77 (63), the reduced symbol ZG of "444" is temporarily stopped at the effect symbol 70a of only the identification portion 70b of "444", and the blue character icon TH. (Including the icon display area 70C) is redisplayed. The special symbol TZ is changing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (64), the display size of the effect symbol 70a of "444" is expanded, and the three effect symbols 70a overlap each other while the central "4" symbol 70b (identification unit). ) Is temporarily stopped in a state where the display size is enlarged and emphasized to be conspicuously larger than the left and right "4" symbols 70b, and the radial flash BF is displayed from behind the three effect symbols 70a. At this time, the blue character icon TH (including the icon display area 70C) is hidden.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (65), a promotion effect (re-lottery effect) is performed to notify whether or not the player is promoted from the normal jackpot to the probabilistic jackpot. In this promotion effect, the three effect symbols 70a are synchronized and fluctuated again with the same combination of effect symbols 70a (for example, all kinds of numbers of the identification unit 70b of the effect symbol 70a are circled once (“1” → “2””).・ ・ ・ ・ Scroll display in the order of “9” → “1”) can be shown at the same time for a predetermined time. A promotion effect is performed to suggest whether or not the player is promoted to the probabilistic jackpot by inciting whether or not the game is stopped in any of the combination display modes of the same odd-numbered symbol matching indicating the mode and the probabilistic jackpot.

In the case of the promotion success effect in which the operation promotion image BG prompting the operation of the effect button 17 is displayed when the promotion effect is being performed, and the effect button 17 is operated to indicate that the person has been promoted to the probabilistic jackpot, FIG. 78 ( As shown in 66), the movable effect member 73 in the standby position moves to the advance position with rainbow-colored light emission, and the rainbow flash AF is displayed with the start of this accessory operation and promoted to a probable change jackpot. Is notified. At this time, the reduced symbol ZG is temporarily stopped in the combination display mode "555" of the same odd-numbered symbol alignment indicating the probability variation jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (67), it is emphasized that the symbol 70b (identification unit) of "555" is temporarily stopped in a state of being enlarged to a display size protruding from the display unit 70, and is a probability variation jackpot. It is displayed, and it is possible to enhance the uplifting feeling that the player has won the probable change jackpot. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 79 (68), the enlarged display effect symbol 70a returns to the normal display size, and the combination display mode “5 (koala) 5 (koala) 5 (koala) 5 (koala) 5 (koala) 5 (koala) 5 (koala) 5 (koala) 5 (koala) 5 (koala) 5 (koala) 5 (koala) 5 (koala) 5 (koala) 5 (koala) 5 (koala) 5 (koala) 5 (koala) 5 (koala) 5 (koala) 5 (koala) 5 (koala) 5 (koala) 5 (koala) ) 5 (Koala) ”, and the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in the same combination of“ 555 ”as the identification unit 70b of the effect symbol 70a.

Before the start of the jackpot game or in the opening game of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 79 (69), the character image M8 of "BIGBONUS" is displayed, and the back light flash DF is displayed from behind the character image M8. , The character image M8 of "BIG BONUS" is highlighted, and the feeling of exhilaration that the player has won the probable change jackpot can be further enhanced. Further, in accordance with the display of the character image M8, the voice of "Big Bonus" is output, and the light emitting body of the lamp repeatedly turns on and blinks.

Although not shown, in the promotion success effect, the first button change effect, the second button change effect, the accessory operation effect, and the button light emission effect are executed at the same effect timing and mode as the jackpot decision effect. It has become like.

On the other hand, in the case of the promotion failure effect suggesting that the promotion effect is performed in FIG. 78 (65) and the effect button 17 is operated to prevent promotion to the probabilistic jackpot, as shown in FIG. 78 (70), "444" is shown. The effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped in a state of being enlarged to a display size protruding from the display unit 70, and it is highlighted that it is a normal jackpot. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 78 (71), the enlarged display effect symbol 70a returns to the normal display size and is temporarily stopped in the combination display mode "444" of the same even-numbered symbol matching indicating a normal jackpot. Later, as shown in FIG. 79 (72), the effect symbol 70a of "4 (chicken) 4 (chicken) 4 (chicken)" is displayed as a definite stop, and the special symbol TZ is displayed with the identification portion 70b of the effect symbol 70a. The same combination of "444" is stopped and displayed, and the blue character icon TH of the icon display area 70C is erased.

Before the start of the jackpot game or in the opening game of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 79 (73), the character image M9 of "BONUS" is displayed, and the back light flash EF is displayed from behind the character image M9. , The character image M9 of "BONUS" is highlighted, and the feeling of exhilaration that the player has won the big hit can be enhanced. Further, in accordance with the display of the character image M9, the voice of "bonus" is output, and the light emitting body of the lamp repeatedly turns on and blinks.

After the jackpot game is completed, as shown in FIG. 80 (80), when the game is controlled in the probabilistic game state, the character image M10 of "Zan RUSH rush" is displayed to notify that the probabilistic game is entered. At the same time, the halo flash FF is displayed from behind the character image M10, the character image M10 of "Zan RUSH rush" is highlighted, and the player surely recognizes that the game has entered the probabilistic gaming state and probable change. You can play the game with high expectations for winning the jackpot. In addition, the voice of "Zan RUSH rush" is output in accordance with the display of the character image M10, and the light emitting body of the lamp repeatedly lights and blinks.

When the game is controlled in the time-saving game state after the big hit game is completed, the character image of "chance time rush" is displayed to notify that the time-saving mode is entered, and the halo is displayed from behind the character image. The flash is displayed and the time saving mode confirmation information indicated by the text image of "Chance time rush" is highlighted.

After entering the probabilistic mode, the game balls continuously win prizes in the second starting port 47, and as shown in FIG. 80 (81), four second hold icons H21 to H24 are displayed on the second display units 70D1 to 70D4. In addition, while the first hold icon is not displayed on the first display units 70B1 to 70B4, the hold number "4" is further displayed on the second hold display area 70F and the hold number "4" is displayed on the first hold display area 70E. In the state where "0" is displayed, the three effect symbols 70a are fixedly stopped and displayed in the combination display mode "632" indicating normal loss, and the special symbol TZ is displayed at the same "632" as the identification unit 70b of the effect symbol 70a. It is displayed as stopped.

The display mode of the effect symbol 70a in the probabilistic mode is different from the display mode of the effect symbol 70a in the normal mode, from the identification unit 70b of the numbers "1" to "9" and the decoration unit 70c of the frame display. It is configured. Further, the background image displayed in the probabilistic mode has a different display mode from the background image (image with a seasonal motif) displayed in the normal mode, and for example, a background image with an outer space as a motif is displayed. ..

In the probabilistic mode, when the effect continuous advance notice effect targeting the 4th 2nd hold memory is performed, the 4th 2nd hold icon wins a bigger hit than the "◎" CD icon (normal icon). It is displayed with a special icon of "★" with high expectation, and the 4th generation notification sound is generated for 0.5 seconds. The fourth generation notification sound (change notification sound) is started to be output from the voice output device 9 in accordance with (synchronously) the frame update timing in which the special icon of "★" is displayed. In addition, in each of the plurality of variable effects performed before the variable effect of the look-ahead target, the ultra-shortened variable effect of loss is performed. In the ultra-shortening variation effect, for example, three effect symbols 70a are synchronously subjected to ultra-shortening variation (2.0 seconds) in a state of being transparent or difficult to see, and then a fixed stop display is displayed.

After the frame display 70c of the effect symbol 70a of "632" that has been fixedly stopped performs a minute movement (or a minute change such as the frame display shining or the color in the frame changing) that the frame display 70c makes one rotation by rotation on the spot. , The next ultra-shortening variation effect of loss is started, and immediately after the start, the character C1 is displayed in the central area and the blue ring shape effect LE surrounding the character C1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 80 (82). After that, as shown in FIG. 80 (83), the three effect symbols 70a of the ultra-shortening fluctuation are displayed as a fixed stop display in the combination display mode "253 frame display" indicating normal loss, and the special symbol TZ is produced. It is stopped and displayed at the same "253" as the identification unit 70b of the symbol 70a.

After the frame display 70c of the three effect symbols 70a of the fixedly stopped "253 frame display" performs a minute operation, the next loss super-shortening variation effect is started, and immediately after the start, FIG. 80 (84) shows. As shown, after the character C1 and the yellow ring shape effect LE are displayed, as shown in FIG. 80 (85), the combination display mode “443 frame” in which the three effect symbols 70a of the ultra-shortening variation indicate normal loss. "Display" displays a fixed stop, and the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed at "443", which is the same as the identification unit 70b of the effect symbol 70a.

After the frame display 70c of the three effect symbols 70a of the "443 frame display" that has been confirmed and stopped performs a minute operation, the next loss super-shortening variation effect is started, and immediately after the start, FIG. 80 (86) shows. As shown, after the character C1 and the green ring shape effect LE are displayed, as shown in FIG. 80 (87), the combination display mode “635 frame” in which the three effect symbols 70a of the ultra-shortening variation indicate normal loss. The fixed stop display is displayed by "display", and the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed at "635" which is the same as the identification unit 70b of the effect symbol 70a.

After the frame display 70c of the three effect symbols 70a of the "635 frame display" that has been fixedly stopped performs a minute operation, the variable effect of the look-ahead target is started. With the start of the variation effect, the second hold icon H21 (special icon "★" displayed on the first display unit 70D1 is shifted to the icon display unit 70C, and the special icon TH is displayed on the icon display unit 70C. "★" is displayed.

Immediately after the start of the variation effect of the look-ahead target, as shown in FIG. 80 (88), the character C1 and the red ring shape effect LE are displayed, and further, the operation promotion image BG1 that prompts the operation of the effect button 17 is displayed.

Then, when the effect button 17 is operated, or when the operation valid period elapses without the effect button 17 being operated, as shown in FIG. 80 (89), a rainbow that notifies that the jackpot winning expectation is high. The character image M11 of the color "Great Chance !!" is displayed, and the backlit flash GF is displayed from behind the character image M11, and the character image M11 of "Great Chance" is highlighted. Then, a challenge production that suggests whether or not the jackpot is won is performed. Further, a chance sound is output in accordance with the display of the character image M11, and the light emitting body of the lamp is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 81 (90), in the challenge production, the roulette R marked with "A", "B", and "C" rotates in the K direction, and "A", "B", and "C" After the fanning effect of inciting which of the above is selected is performed, a roulette effect in which any of "A", "B", and "C" is determined is performed according to the operation of the effect button 17. Then, when "A" is determined, it is set to be a big hit. Further, when the roulette effect is being performed, the reduced symbol ZG is temporarily stopped in the reach state "7 ↓ 7".

As shown in FIG. 81 (91), a promotion image BG2 showing a character image prompting the operation of the effect button 17 of the rainbow-colored display color “press!” And a gauge indicating the operation validity period of the effect button 17 is displayed. When the effect button 17 is operated, or when the operation valid period elapses without the effect button 17 being operated, the rotation speed of the roulette gradually slows down as shown in FIG. 81 (92), and the upper end of the roulette When the selection decision effect in which "A" is stopped and displayed on the side is performed, as shown in FIG. 81 (93), the movable effect member 73 in the standby position moves to the advance position with rainbow-colored light emission, and at the same time, The "success" character image M12 and the backlit flash HF are displayed from behind the character image M12, and the "success" character image M12 is highlighted.

Then, as shown in FIG. 81 (94), the effect symbol 70a of "777" is temporarily stopped in a state of being enlarged to a display size protruding from the display unit, and it is highlighted that it is a probabilistic jackpot. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 81 (95), the enlarged display of the effect symbol 70a returns to the normal display size, and the odd-numbered symbol matching combination display mode “777 frame display” indicating the probability variation jackpot is fixedly stopped. At the same time, the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in the same combination of "777" as the identification unit 70b of the effect symbol 70a, and the special icon TH in the icon display area 70C is erased.

Before the start of the jackpot game or in the opening game of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 81 (96), the character image M13 of "SUPER BONUS" is displayed, and the halo flash IF is displayed from behind the character image M13. Then, the character image M13 of "SUPER BONUS" is highlighted. Further, in accordance with the display of the character image M13, the voice of "super bonus" is output, and the light emitting body of the lamp repeatedly turns on and blinks.

In this way, when the main effect that directs the progress of the game is performed in the variable effect, the highlight display color maintenance effect by the effect image of the predetermined color that adds a visual effect to the main effect and the leading role. The backlit flash image that emphasizes the display of the output is repeatedly emphasized, and the effect that appeals to the player's vision raises the player's attention to the main effect and enhances the interest of the effect and the game. It becomes possible.

In the highlight display color maintenance effect, when the pseudo continuous notice or reach effect is executed in the variable effect, the main effect performed in the pseudo continuous notice or reach effect with the display color of the effect image in the pseudo continuous notice or reach effect. The display color that suggests the degree of expectation will change step by step according to the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous production and the production mode of the main production that develops according to the reach production. Therefore, it is possible to improve the entertainment of the production by the production effect that raises the expectation of the player to win the big hit.

The display area of the effect image shown in the embodiment is an example in performing the highlighting color maintenance effect, and the effect image is formed on the outer edges of the four sides constituting the outer edge of the display portion of the first image display device 70. May be highlighted, or an effect image including a character display is displayed near the outer edges of the left and right (or top and bottom) of the display unit, and the effect image is displayed from bottom to top (or from left to right). It may be highlighted by a telop type that flows through the image.

In the repetitive emphasis effect, a backlit flash image (confirmed flash image) is displayed from behind a character image showing confirmation information such as an effect mode, a jackpot symbol, a jackpot judgment result, and a winning jackpot type, and the confirmation indicated by the character image is confirmed. It is possible to improve the entertainment of the production by giving a visual impact that makes the display of information stand out and enhancing the uplifting feeling of the player.

It should be noted that the presence or absence of the emphasis effect may be determined according to the type of the reach effect executed in the variable effect. For example, the SP reach effect may be set not to execute the emphasis effect, and the SP SP reach effect may be set to execute the emphasis effect.

In the SP reach effect and the battle effect performed in the SPSP reach effect, the jackpot winning expectation may increase as the ally character is changed to the ally character on the side with the higher jackpot expectation. Further, the display color of the chain effect image may be associated with the type of the ally character. For example, in the case of the ally character A, the chain effect image is displayed in "blue", and when the ally character B has a higher expectation of a big hit than the ally character A, the chain effect image is displayed in "green".

In the pseudo-continuous notice, when the pseudo-ream effect is performed with the normal reach in between, the pseudo-ream symbol of the "ream" whose display size is larger than the normal display size of the effect symbol is temporarily stopped in the pseudo-ream effect. , The effect symbol is changed again, and when the effect symbol is changed again, the display color of the flame effect is changed.

(About the operation end timing of the effect button 17 during the fixed valid period)
FIG. 82 is a diagram showing a timing chart when the effect button 17 is operated 2 seconds after the occurrence of the determination valid period of the jackpot determination effect shown in FIG. 77 (61-1).

At the timing of T0, the SPSP reach effect is executed. Next, at the timing of T1, the sign effect (see FIG. 74 (41)) is started. Then, at the timing of T2, which is a predetermined time before the determined valid period occurs, the button change effect in which the effect button 17 begins to change to the protruding state (specific state) is started (see FIG. 74 (41)).

Next, when the change to the protruding state (specific state) of the effect button 17 is completed at T3, the determined valid period is generated and the operation promotion effect is started (FIG. 74 (42). Then, the determined valid period. When the effect button 17 is operated at the timing of T4, which is 2 seconds after the start of, the jackpot determination effect is started (see FIG. 77 (61-1)), and the effect button 17 is in a vibrating state (specific state). ), And the vibration sound (“blur”) is output from the voice output device 9, so that the second button change effect (operation effect) is performed. Further, the button light emission effect is performed (FIG. 77 (61). -1) See).

Next, at the timing of T5, which is one second after the effect button 17 is operated, the operation of the effect button 17 ends. Even after the operation of the effect button 17 is completed, the jackpot determination effect continues (see FIG. 77 (61-2)). Then, at the timing of T6, which is 1.7 seconds after the effect button 17 is operated, the second button change effect and the button light emission effect end with the start of the return operation of the movable effect member 73 to the standby position. (See FIG. 77 (61-3)).

Next, at the timing of T7, which is 2 seconds after the effect button 17 is operated, the return of the movable effect member 73 to the standby position is completed, the jackpot decision effect ends, and the victory confirmation effect starts. (See FIG. 77 (62)).

In addition, after the operation of the effect button 17 that started the big hit decision effect ends once at the timing of T5, the effect button 17 is operated again until the timing of T7 where the big hit decision effect continues, and the operation is performed. Regardless of the timing, the jackpot decision production will end at the timing of T7. In other words, even if the effect button 17 is operated again between the timing of T5 and the timing of T7, the jackpot decision effect continues until the timing of T7 regardless of the operation start timing or operation end timing. do.

Then, at the timing of T8 after a certain time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed from the start of the winning confirmation effect, the three effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped (see FIG. 77 (63)), and 1 second after the temporary stop. At the timing of T9, the three effect symbols 70a are displayed as a fixed stop, and at the timing of T10, which is 0.5 seconds after the fixed stop is displayed, the variable effect is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the flow of the game before and after the execution of the jackpot determination effect when only the operation timing of the effect button 17 is different from that of FIG. 82 will be described. Here, the same parts as those in FIG. 82 will be omitted, and different parts will be described.

As shown in FIG. 83, when the effect button 17 is operated at the timing of T4', which is 3 seconds after the start of the determination valid period, the jackpot determination effect is started. Further, the effect button 17 is changed to the vibration state (specific state) by operating the button vibration motor, and the second button change effect is performed by outputting the vibration sound from the voice output device 9. Further, a button light emission effect is performed.

Next, at the timing of T5', which is 0.7 seconds after the effect button 17 is operated, the operation of the effect button 17 ends. Even if the operation of the effect button 17 is completed, the jackpot determination effect continues. Then, at the timing of T6'1.7 seconds after the effect button 17 is operated, the second button change effect and the button light emission effect end with the start of returning to the standby position of the movable effect member 73. ..

Next, at the timing of T7', which is 2 seconds after the effect button 17 is operated, the return of the movable effect member 73 to the standby position is completed, the jackpot determination effect is completed, and the jackpot notification effect is started. To. Then, at the timing of T8'after a certain period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed from the start of the jackpot notification effect, the jackpot notification effect ends.

In this way, regarding the jackpot decision effect (second button change effect, button light emission effect, accessory operation effect), is the operation end timing (operation timing) of the effect button 17 during the determined valid period the first timing? Regardless of the second timing, which is later than that, the effect button 17 ends at the same (common) timing after a certain period of time (2 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the effect button 17. Therefore, even if the operation end timing of the effect button 17 varies, the jackpot decision effect can be executed over the same time, and it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of overlooking the jackpot decision effect. ..

Regarding the jackpot decision effect (second button change effect, button light emission effect, accessory operation effect), the operation timing (operation timing) of the effect button 17 during the decision valid period is the first timing or later. Regardless of the second timing, it ends at the same (common) timing, that is, after a certain period of time (2 seconds) has elapsed since the effect button 17 was operated. Therefore, even if the operation timing of the effect button 17 varies, the jackpot determination effect can be executed over the same time, and the inconvenience of overlooking the jackpot determination effect can be avoided.

Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the flow of the game before and after the execution of the jackpot decision effect when the effect button 17 is not operated during the determination valid period will be described. Here, the same parts as those in FIG. 83 will be omitted, and different parts will be described.

As shown in FIG. 84, when the effect button 17 is not operated at the timing of T4'3 seconds after the start of the determined valid period and the determined valid period ends, the big hit determination effect is started. Further, with the end of the determined valid period, the effect button 17 returns from the protruding state to the normal state by operating the button drive motor 17b, and the effect button 17 vibrates (specific state) by operating the button vibration motor 17c. ), And the vibration sound is output from the voice output device 9, so that the second button change effect is performed. Further, a button light emission effect is performed.

Next, at the timing of T6', which is 1.7 seconds after the end of the determined valid period, the second button change effect and the button light emission effect end with the start of returning to the standby position of the movable effect member 73.

Next, at the timing of T7', which is 2 seconds after the end of the determined valid period, the return of the movable effect member 73 to the standby position is completed, the jackpot determination effect ends, and the jackpot notification effect is started. Then, at the timing of T8'after a certain period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed from the start of the jackpot notification effect, the jackpot notification effect ends.

In this way, even if the effect button 17 is not operated and the determined valid period ends, the second button change effect is performed from the end of the determined valid period, and the button light emission effect is performed. In addition to avoiding the inconvenience of missing the operation of the effect button 17, it is possible to reliably perform the jackpot determination effect regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated.

<Contents of the invention described in the third embodiment>
<About emphasis production>
In a conventional gaming machine, various game effects are performed according to the progress of the game, but the game becomes monotonous unless a production having an impactful and visually appealing effect that attracts the player is performed. Therefore, there is a problem that it leads to a decrease in the enjoyment of the game and the playability. Therefore, with conventional gaming machines, there is still room for improvement in order to improve the enjoyment of gaming.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, an effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing a predetermined effect related to a game is provided, and the effect control means is a display means (first image display device 70). Using a main effect (for example, an effect by a symbol display, a character display, a character display, etc.) performed at a predetermined position of the above, and at least a part of a predetermined area in the outer edge direction of the display means (70) rather than the main effect. It is possible to execute an emphasis effect (for example, an effect by an effect image, a flash image, etc.) that emphasizes the main effect, and the main effect is a first main effect (for example, an effect in which the main effect of the effect is performed in the first form). The effect by the symbol / character display in the pseudo-continuous notice of FIG. 53, the character display in the reach effect of FIG. 56, and the second main effect (for example, a display mode different from the first main effect). The emphasis effect includes a first emphasis effect (a first emphasis effect based on the first main effect), including an accessory operation effect of the result notification effect of FIG. 63, a character image in the jackpot effect of FIG. 64, and the like). For example, the effect image of FIGS. 53 and 56) and a second enhancement effect (for example, the flash image of FIGS. 63 and 64) performed based on the second main effect are included, and the second effect is included. In the case of executing the first main effect, the emphasis effect is more likely to change to the emphasis effect of a different display mode than in the case of executing the main effect of. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problems, a determination means for determining whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to the player, and an effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing a predetermined effect related to the game. ), And the effect control means has a variation effect accompanied by a variation display of a symbol based on the determination result of the determination means, and a predetermined position (for example, a central region) of the display means (first image display device 70). The main effect (for example, the effect by the symbol display, the character display, the character display, etc. shown in FIG. 52) performed in the display area including the main effect, and at least a part of a predetermined area in the outer edge direction of the display means than the main effect. It is possible to perform an emphasis effect (for example, an effect by an effect image, a flash image, etc. shown in FIG. 52) that emphasizes the main effect by using the main effect, and the main effect is a first main effect (for example, FIG. 56). The effect by the character shown in FIG. The control means are the first main effect and the first emphasis effect (for example, the effect by the effect image shown in FIG. 56), and the second main effect and the second emphasis effect (for example, FIG. 64, FIG. The effect of the flash image shown in 66) can be executed during a predetermined variation effect period (for example, during a reach effect, a predetermined number of times variation zone), and during the execution period of the first emphasis effect, the first emphasis effect is performed. A related effect (eg, FIG. 57, FIG. 58) that changes the main effect to a third main effect (for example, an effect in which the characters shown in FIGS. 57 and 58 are increased or replaced) having a display mode different from that of the first main effect. (Character-related effects shown in) can be executed. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, a determination means for determining whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to the player, and an effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing a predetermined effect related to the game. ), And the effect control means has, based on the determination result of the determination means, a variation effect accompanied by a variation display of a symbol, and a predetermined position (for example, a central region) of the display means (first image display device 70). The main effect (for example, the effect by the symbol display, the character display, the character display, etc. shown in FIG. 52) performed in the display area including the main effect, and at least a part of a predetermined area in the outer edge direction of the display means than the main effect. It is possible to perform an emphasis effect (for example, an effect by an effect image, a flash image, etc. shown in FIG. 52) that emphasizes the main effect by using the main effect, and the main effect is a first main effect (for example, FIG. 73). The second main effect of the display mode by characters (character display of "CHANCE UP" in the reach effect shown in FIG. 73), which is different from the first main effect. The effect control means includes the first main effect and the emphasized effect, and the second main effect and the emphasized effect during a predetermined variation effect period (for example, during the reach effect, the effect is varied a predetermined number of times. Zone) is feasible, and in the case where a specific state is reached after the second main effect is executed during the predetermined variable effect period (for example, reach loss eye, probability variation jackpot, jackpot symbol), the above-mentioned There are cases where a specific state is not reached (reach hit, normal jackpot, lost pattern), and when the specific state is reached, there is a third main effect (a third main effect in a display mode different from the second main effect). For example, the character display of "NT Challenge" shown in FIG. 76, the character display of "Zan RUSH rush" shown in FIG. 80, the character display of "BONUS" shown in FIG. Is made feasible. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, an effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing a predetermined effect related to the game is provided, and the effect control means is a display means (first image display device 70). ) At a predetermined position (for example, a display area including a central area) (for example, an effect by a symbol display, a character display, a character display, etc. shown in FIG. 52) and an outer edge of the display means rather than the main effect. It is possible to perform an emphasis effect (for example, an effect by an effect image, a flash image, etc. shown in FIG. 52) that emphasizes the main effect by using at least a predetermined area in the direction, and the main effect is the effect. In the first main effect (for example, the effect by the character A shown in FIG. 73) performed during the execution of the emphasis effect and the second main effect (for example, the effect by the character A shown in FIG. 73) performed during the execution of the emphasis effect. The effect control means changes from the first main effect to the second main effect via a predetermined transition effect (for example, a chance-up notice shown in FIG. 73). It has become possible. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problem, a storage means (main RAM 110c) that can store the determination information acquired by satisfying the acquisition condition as a hold storage, and a hold storage stored in the storage means. Based on the above, the first hold information (for example, the hold icons H11 to H14 shown in FIG. 67) and the second hold information (for example, the number hold shown in FIG. 67) whose display mode is different from that of the first hold information. Displayable information display means (for example, first to fourth display units 70B1 to 70B4 shown in FIG. 67, reserved number display areas 70E and 70F) and effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing a predetermined effect related to the game. ), And the effect control means is a main effect (for example, the symbol display shown in FIG. 52) performed at a predetermined position (for example, a display area including a central area) of the display means (first image display device 70). An effect (for example, an effect image shown in FIG. 52) that emphasizes the main effect by using at least a predetermined area in the outer edge direction of the display means rather than the main effect (effect by character display, character display, etc.). , Flash image, etc.), and the main effect is the first main effect (for example, the effect by the character in the pseudo continuous notice shown in FIG. 53, the character in the reach effect shown in FIG. 56). The enhanced effect includes a second main effect (for example, an effect by character display in the jackpot effect shown in FIG. 64) whose display mode is different from that of the first main effect. According to the first main effect, the first display mode (for example, the pseudo 1 yellow effect image shown in FIG. 70 and the blue effect image in the reach effect shown in FIG. 73) is displayed in a predetermined first period. Then, in a predetermined second period, a second display mode different from the first display mode (for example, the pseudo 2 green effect image shown in FIG. 71, and the green effect image in the reach effect shown in FIG. 73). ) Is displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode (afterglow flash image shown in FIGS. 76 and 79) in a predetermined third period according to the first effect (for example, effect image display) and the second main effect. The information display means includes the second effect (for example, flash image display) to be displayed, the first effect displays the first hold information and the second hold information, and the second effect displays the first hold information and the second hold information. While the second hold information is displayed, the first hold information is hidden. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As the sixth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a determination means for determining whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to the player and an effect control means for executing a predetermined effect related to the game (effect control group 130). ), And the effect control means has a variation effect accompanied by a variation display of a symbol based on the determination result of the determination means, and a predetermined position (for example, a central region) of the display means (first image display device 70). The main effect (for example, the effect by the symbol display, the character display, the character display, etc. shown in FIG. 52) performed in the display area including the main effect, and at least a part of a predetermined area in the outer edge direction of the display means than the main effect. An emphasis effect (for example, an effect by an effect image, a flash image, etc. shown in FIG. 52) for emphasizing the main effect, a movable effect for operating a movable member (movable effect member 73), and the special game are performed. It is possible to execute a suggestion effect suggesting the degree of expectation (for example, a dialogue display effect, a look-ahead effect, etc.), and the effect control means is a first main effect (for example, an effect by the character A shown in FIG. 73) and the effect. The emphasis effect (for example, the effect by the blue effect image shown in FIG. 73), the second main effect (for example, the effect by the character B shown in FIGS. 73 and 74) and the emphasis effect (for example, FIG. 73, FIG. The effect of the green effect image shown in 74) can be executed during a predetermined variation effect period (for example, during a reach effect, a predetermined number of times variation zone), and from the first main effect during the predetermined variation effect period. When the second main effect can be changed and a specific suggestive effect (for example, the high expectation line display effect shown in FIG. 73) is executed during the predetermined variable effect period, the specific suggestive effect is performed. Is easier to execute the movable effect than when is not executed. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

<About button change production>
In the conventional gaming machine, it is generally determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and based on the result of the determination, the variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol is executed. In such a gaming machine, an operation unit that can be operated by a player can be changed between a normal state and a specific state, and a change effect that changes the operation unit to a specific state during the variation effect is executed. There was something like that. However, in such a gaming machine, there is a problem that the directing effect of the production using the operation unit is low and the entertainment of the game is poor.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, an effect of controlling a variation effect accompanied by a variation display of the effect symbol is performed based on a determination result of whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player. In a gaming machine provided with control means, the operation means provided by a player can be operated, the operation means can be changed between a normal state and a specific state, and the effect control means puts the operation means into a specific state. It is possible to execute a change effect to be changed, and the first valid period for notifying the degree of expectation that the special game is executed according to the operation of the operating means, and the special game according to the operation of the operating means. A second valid period for notifying whether or not is executed can be generated during the variation effect, and if the operating means is operated during the occurrence of the first valid period, the special game is not executed. In that case, the change effect is executed with the first probability, and when the special game is executed, the change effect is executed with a second probability higher than the first probability, and the second valid period is being generated. When the operating means is operated, the change effect is not executed if the special game is not executed, the change effect is executed when the special game is executed, and the change effect is being executed. When the operating means is operated, the change effect is terminated at a timing when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the change effect, regardless of the end timing of the operation. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, an effect of controlling a variation effect accompanied by a variation display of the effect symbol is performed based on a determination result of whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player. In a gaming machine provided with control means, the operation means provided by a player can be operated, the operation means can be changed between a normal state and a specific state, and the effect control means puts the operation means into a specific state. It is possible to execute a change effect to be changed, and the first valid period for notifying the degree of expectation that the special game is executed according to the operation of the operating means, and the special game according to the operation of the operating means. A second valid period for notifying whether or not is executed can be generated during the variation effect, and if the operating means is operated during the occurrence of the first valid period, the special game is not executed. In that case, the change effect is executed with the first probability, and when the special game is executed, the change effect is executed with a second probability higher than the first probability, and the second valid period is being generated. When the operating means is operated, the change effect is not executed if the special game is not executed, the change effect is executed when the special game is executed, and the change effect is being executed. When the operating means is operated, the change effect is terminated at the timing when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the second valid period, regardless of the end timing of the operation. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, an effect of controlling a variation effect accompanied by a variation display of the effect symbol is performed based on a determination result of whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player. In a gaming machine provided with control means, the operation means provided by a player can be operated, the operation means can be changed between a normal state and a specific state, and light can be emitted. The effect control means is the above-mentioned effect control means. It is possible to execute a change effect that changes the operating means to a specific state and a light emitting effect that causes the operating means to emit light in a predetermined mode. The first effective period for notifying the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed in response to the operation of the operation means, including the second change effect in which the operation means is in a specific state for a long period, and the operation means of the operation means. A second valid period for notifying whether or not the special game is executed according to the operation can be generated during the variable effect, and the light emission effect is executed in the first effective period, and the first. The first change effect can be executed in response to the operation of the operating means during the generation of the validity period, the light emission effect is executed during the second validity period, and the light emission effect is executed during the generation of the second validity period. The second change effect can be executed according to the operation of the operation means, and when the light emission effect and the second change effect are executed, the light emission is performed at the end of the second change effect. The production is finished. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, both the effect button 17 and the effect lever are provided, and when the operation effect is a notice effect (line notice), the effect button 17 is operated, and when the operation effect is a result notification effect (decision effect, promotion effect). The effect lever may be operated, or vice versa.

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine, but can also be used for a rotating cylinder type gaming machine (so-called slot machine). Furthermore, it can also be used for a ball game machine and an arrange ball game machine.

In addition, the embodiments disclosed this time should be considered to be exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

1 Pachinko machine 70 1st image display device 130 Production control board

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine equipped with an effect control means for executing a predetermined effect related to a game.
The effect control means is
The main production performed at the predetermined position of the display means,
It is possible to perform an emphasis effect that emphasizes the main effect by using at least a predetermined area in the outer edge direction of the display means rather than the main effect.
The main production is
It can be executed in a plurality of types according to the first form or the second form different from the first form.
The first main effect performed during the execution of the emphasis effect in the main effect of the second form, and
Including the second main effect performed during the execution of the emphasis effect in the main effect of the second form.
The emphasis effect is
When the main effect is executed in the first form, the first effect among a plurality of types of emphasis effects can be executed.
When the main effect is executed in the second form, the second effect among a plurality of types of emphasis effects can be executed.
The effect control means is
After changing from the first main effect to the second main effect through a predetermined transition effect , the third form of the display mode including characters different from the first and second main effects or the third aspect. It is possible to execute a third main effect that can be executed in the fourth form of the display mode including characters different from the form and a specific emphasis effect of a predetermined light emitting mode that emphasizes the display mode of the third main effect .
The specific emphasis effect is
When the third main effect is executed in the third mode, the third effect displayed in the first light emitting mode is executed.
When the third main effect is executed in the fourth mode, the fourth effect displayed in a second light emitting mode different from the first light emitting mode is executed.
It is understood that the third effect executed in the third mode and the specific game advantageous to the player are more likely to be executed when the second effect is executed than when the first effect is executed. A featured gaming machine.

Images